JP6970325B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game and generating a gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined result.

In a conventional gaming machine, there is one that shakes and displays identification information (effect pattern) to notify that the variable display game is not completely stopped (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-159962

In the conventional gaming machine, the vibration width of the identification information in the temporarily stopped state is not taken into consideration, and there is room for improvement in the interest of the gaming.

An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of a game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a display device capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information including a character unit and a numerical value unit, and a display device capable of controlling the display of the variable display game on the display device can be controlled. In a gaming machine provided with various effect control means, the effect control means can execute a temporary stop in which at least one identification information is vibrated and displayed in the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game. The temporary stop execution means can execute the second temporary stop after the first temporary stop, in which the number of identification information for executing the temporary stop is larger than that of the first temporary stop. The identification information for executing the second temporary stop includes the identification information for executing the first temporary stop, and the identification information is vibrated by a predetermined width in the first temporary stop to identify in the second temporary stop. The width of the information vibration is made smaller than the predetermined width, and the vibration time of the identification information in the first temporary stop is shorter than the vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop. The vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop is set to be longer than the symbol stop display time for displaying the identification information for which the result of the variable display game is confirmed, and the identification information reaches in the second temporary stop. when performing specific effect a state to move the identification information, to erase the character portions while leaving the numerals portion, all the identification information to perform the second provisional stop, temporary stop in the same vibration amplitude To execute.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the discharge ball number display part. The display mode of the payout rate display unit will be described. The display mode of the accessory ratio display unit will be described. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the initial value random number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a table showing the priority of winning opening monitoring. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the modification of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning number counter update processing. It is a figure explaining the discharge ball number area, the acquisition ball number area, and the acquisition ball number area for each character. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a ball ejection performance monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of payout busy signal check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 bytes distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure changing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process of displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process of displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during opening of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing the residual ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end setting process 2. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the processing while displaying a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the middle processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the Pyramid residual ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the layout example of the display screen of a display device. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (the payout number command) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ball ejection performance monitoring processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the ball ejection performance monitoring processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the effect point control process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hole / player setting mode processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, it is the first half of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. In the third embodiment, it is the latter half of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. In the third embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the ending at the end of a big hit state. In the third embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the player setting mode of waiting for a customer. It is a front view of the game board provided with the sub-display device which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the ejected ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the acquired ball number area for each accessory, which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (the payout number command) which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory ratio setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability (time saving) end processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot system command processing which concerns on 4th Embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is the first half of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. In the fourth embodiment, it is the latter half of the screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ball ejection performance monitoring processing which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the over prize notification processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the notification mode of the 1st over winning notification and the 2nd over winning notification which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a table which shows other example of the notification mode of the 1st over winning notification and the 2nd over winning notification according to the 6th embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hole / player setting mode processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device in the hall setting mode which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game by 7th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game by the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game by the modification 2 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen of the display device in the modification 2 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display screen which applied the modification 2 of the 7th Embodiment in the case of the big hit without re-lottery, and the case of the big hit with re-lottery.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

At the bottom of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate the effect button 25.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed by the player operating the effect operation device not only during the execution of the variable display game but also during the non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (special gaming state) in a variable display game. ), Small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball punching hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 has an inlet 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35. In the present embodiment, there are two types: a winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 on the left and a winning opening switch 35b of the general winning opening 35 on the right.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that gives a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second) is directly below the starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. A normal variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probable change state (excluding the latent probable change state), the time saving state (the normal electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side to open the large winning opening. A special variable winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the large winning opening as a detection means for detecting the game ball in the large winning opening.

As described above, the game area 32 is provided with a general winning opening 35 and a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening) as a plurality of winning areas in which the game ball can be won without any particular condition. Further, as a variable winning device that operates when a predetermined condition (a predetermined result of the special figure variable display game or the normal figure variable display game) is satisfied and the game ball can be won, the normal variable winning device 37 (second). A starting winning opening) and a special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) are provided.

When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening), the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) wins the winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In this embodiment, the prizes of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening), the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening), the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening). The number of balls is 2, 3, 10, and 14, respectively, and the numbers increase in this order.

Further, the game area 32 below the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the out port 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure display, lamps D10, D18), and the start (holding) storage number of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56). Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is informed that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed time (normal hitting time), and the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp). D8), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D9) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D17) that displays the status, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 39) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed. All LEDs are turned on and off (all LEDs blink at the same time), circular lighting (turns on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from any one LED), or multiple lights. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the batch display device 50 includes a discharge ball number display unit 66 that displays the number of discharged balls of the gaming machine 10, a ball ejection rate display unit 67 that displays the ball ejection rate of the gaming machine 10, and a bonus ratio of the gaming machine 10. The accessory ratio display unit 68 for displaying the above is provided. Each of the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of a plurality of (or even one) 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. The display unit constitutes a display means for displaying the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio.

It should be noted that the ejected ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are not limited to those that directly display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. The number of balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio may be indirectly displayed (for example, a countdown display of the number of ejected balls described later). That is, it suffices that the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 can display information regarding the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively. Further, the number of ejected balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio numerically on a 7-segment type display. Instead, it may be displayed on a level meter or the like.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32, and is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of launched balls, which is the number of game balls launched from the ball launching device into the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. As will be described later, a counting means for counting the number of ejected balls (number of launched balls) is provided. Then, the ejected ball number display unit 66 (discharged ball number display means) displays the ejected ball number, so that the player can grasp the number of game balls fired in the game area 32, and the convenience is improved.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls. Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning, the payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even if the actual prize balls are not paid out due to running out of balls or the like. It should be noted that the ball ejection rate may be simply obtained from the number of acquired balls between 0 and 100 each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 as in the present embodiment. It may be calculated accurately from the above definition by using the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) and the number of ejected balls accumulated from the power-on of the game machine to the present. In the past, the payout rate was not displayed, but in the present embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (ball payout rate display means) displays the payout rate to the player. It is possible to have an interest and interest in the general winning opening 35. And it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, and the jackpot state (that is, fanfare, ending). Is the ratio (%) (so-called continuous bonus ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls won by bonus) obtained by winning a prize in the big prize opening. In addition, the prize ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) (large prize). The ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (generally used so-called bonus ratio). (Ratio of all prizes)) may be used. Since the number of prize balls is counted at the time of winning, the prize ratio can be calculated even if the actual prize balls are not paid out due to running out of balls or the like. In the present embodiment, the bonus ratio display unit 68 (feature ratio display means) displays the bonus ratio, which improves the interest of the game and gives the player an impression that it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning device (open state). Because it has the impression that many games occur), it motivates the player to continue playing the game. In addition, the accessory ratio display is an index for the player to determine whether or not to continue playing the game. Further, since the winning of the general winning opening 35 affects the winning combination ratio, the player can be interested in the general winning opening 35 through the winning combination display.

A display mode of the discharge ball number display unit 66 will be described with reference to FIG. 2B. The discharge ball number display unit 66 is composed of two 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is counted down and displayed (100-number of discharged balls) on the discharge ball number display unit 66. Further, the number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). As will be described later, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the ejection rate displayed on the ball ejection rate display unit 67 is until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. It will be updated to the latest payout rate during the period. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed as it is on the ball output rate display unit 67, the ball output rate will be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the number of ejected balls is counted down from "99" to "00" on the ejected ball number display unit 66, but it may be configured to count up from "00" to "99". When the number of ejected balls reaches 100, "00" is displayed on the ejected ball number display unit 66. In the present embodiment, the ball ejection rate display of the ball ejection rate display unit 67 is updated to the latest one at the timing when "00" is displayed on the ejected ball number display unit 66. After the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), the discharge ball number display unit 66 starts the countdown display from the display of "00". Further, the number of discharged balls is cleared to 0 at the timing of the end of the big hit, and the number of discharged balls display unit 66 starts the countdown display from the display of "00" after the end of the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in a state other than when the game ball is being launched or in a customer waiting demonstration state, the ejected ball number display unit 66 is in a non-display state with the display segment (light emitting unit) turned off. good. In addition, the state other than the launching of the game ball and the customer waiting demonstration state are collectively referred to as the "customer waiting state". The state other than the firing of the game ball is a state in which the touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is turned off. Further, when the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) transmits the customer waiting demo command to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4), the game machine 10 is in the customer waiting demo state (the state during the customer waiting demo). On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched, the segment (light emitting part) of the display is lit on the ejected ball number display unit 66 so that the player in the game can recognize it, and the countdown display is displayed. Run. Since this is a privilege for the player during the game, the operation of the game machine 10 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the ejected ball number display unit 66 executes an error display (“EE” display) in order to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball out and overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since it is possible to manually insert the game ball into the winning opening while the frame is open, the display of the ejected ball number display unit 66 is not updated, but the ejected ball number is counted by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. ..

With reference to FIG. 2C, a display mode of the ball ejection rate display unit 67 will be described. The ball ejection rate display unit 67 is composed of two 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), the ball ejection rate is displayed only from 0 to 99 on the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and when the ball ejection rate reaches 100 or more, "99" is blinked or lit. FF "is displayed.

As described above, the ball ejection rate display of the ball ejection rate display unit 67 is displayed until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100 each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number). It will be updated to the latest payout rate. Each time the ball ejection rate display unit 67 updates the ball ejection rate display, the emission color of the segment (light emitting unit) is changed to clearly indicate that the ball ejection rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display unit 67 changes from red to green or from green to red each time the payout rate display is updated. It should be noted that the ball ejection rate display unit 67 can always display the ball ejection rate in a single color without changing the color.

Further, the ball ejection rate display unit 67 may change the color of the ball ejection rate display according to the ball ejection rate based on the design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state). As a result, it is possible to notify and warn of the deviation of the ball output rate from the design value. For example, the payout rate is displayed in green in the range of 30 to 50, displayed in yellow in the range of 10 to 29 and 51 to 60, and displayed in red in the range of 0 to 9 and 61 or more. Also, during the big hit, the ball output rate becomes very high, so it may be displayed in a different color (white or rainbow) instead of red. In the configuration where the ball ejection rate is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the ball ejection rate display blinks when the ball ejection rate greatly deviates from the design value (when the ball ejection rate is equal to or more than the predetermined value or is equal to or less than the predetermined value). You can do it.

Further, the ball ejection rate display unit 67 displays "00" after the power is turned on (including power failure recovery). Further, the payout rate is cleared to 0 at the timing when the big hit ends, and the payout rate display unit 67 displays "00".

As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in a state other than when the game ball is being launched or in a customer waiting demo state (that is, a customer waiting state), the ball output rate display unit 67 is in a state where the display segment is turned off and is not displayed. You can be. On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched, the segment of the display is lit on the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the ball ejection rate is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize it. Since this is a privilege for the player during the game, the operation of the game machine 10 can be increased. Further, since the ball ejection rate cannot be obtained until the number of ejected balls reaches 100 after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the ball ejection rate display unit 67 may be hidden.

On the contrary, the ball ejection rate display unit 67 displays the ball ejection rate in a state other than the state in which the game ball is being launched or in the customer waiting demo state, and is output in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched. It may be configured to hide the ball rate. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to play in consideration of the ball ejection rate.

As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the ball output rate display unit 67 executes an error display (“EE” display) in order to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball out and overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since it is possible to manually insert the game ball into the winning slot while the frame is open, the display of the ball ejection rate display unit 67 is not updated, but the ball ejection rate is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

A display mode of the accessory ratio display unit 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 2D. The accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of three 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display (LED lamp). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the accessory ratio display unit 68 displays the value of the accessory ratio (%) from "00.0" to the first decimal place of "99.9". When the accessory ratio is 100%, it is displayed as "100". For example, when the accessory ratio display unit 68 is composed of four 7-segment type displays (LED lamps), the value of the accessory ratio (%) up to the second decimal place is displayed.

Further, the bonus ratio display unit 68 displays the bonus ratio according to the bonus ratio, based on the reference value determined by the rules (for example, the continuous bonus ratio of 60%, which is a prize ball due to the continuous operation of the bonus ball). You may change the color. This makes it possible to notify and warn of deviations from the reference value of the accessory ratio. For example, when the bonus ratio corresponds to the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 55.0% and yellow in the range of 55.1% to 60.0%. It is displayed in red in the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, during the big hit, the accessory ratio becomes large, so it may be displayed in a different color (white or rainbow). Further, for example, the bonus ratio is obtained by winning a commonly used so-called bonus ratio (all prizes (special variable winning device 39 and ordinary variable winning device 37) out of the total number of winning balls). When it corresponds to the ratio of the number of prize balls), the standard value is 70%, and the accessory ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0%, and is 65.1% to 70.0%. It is displayed in yellow in the range of, and displayed in red in the range of 70.1% to 100%. In the configuration where the accessory ratio is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the accessory ratio display blinks when the accessory ratio deviates significantly from the design value (when the value is equal to or greater than the specified value or below the specified value). You can do it.

The number of prize balls for each character (number of acquired balls for each character) for calculating the character ratio of the character ratio display unit 68 is accumulated until the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and is cleared when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on (including power failure recovery), the accessory ratio display is displayed as "00.0". After that, in the bonus ratio display unit 68, the bonus ratio is updated at any time every time a prize is awarded. It should be noted that the number of acquired balls for each character (also referred to as the number of acquired balls for the character) for each set is set from a plurality of blocks (storage area of a predetermined byte), with the special figure variation display game having a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) as one set. In this case, the number of acquired balls for each accessory is not cleared and is retained even when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in a state other than when the game ball is being launched or in a customer waiting demo state (that is, a customer waiting state), the accessory ratio display unit 68 is not turned off by turning off the display segment (light emitting unit). It may be in the displayed state. On the other hand, in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched, the segment (light emitting part) of the display is lit on the character ratio display unit 68, and the character ratio is set so that the player during the game can recognize it. indicate. Since this is a privilege for the player during the game, the operation of the game machine 10 can be increased.

On the contrary, in a state other than the launching of the game ball or in the customer waiting demo state, the character ratio display unit 68 displays the character ratio, and the role is used in the state where the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched. It may be configured to hide the object ratio. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a gaming table to play in consideration of the accessory ratio.

As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the accessory ratio display unit 68 executes an error display (“EEE” display) in order to notify the player during the occurrence of an error or fraud that affects the game. Here, the errors and frauds that affect the game are errors and frauds related to glass frame opening and front frame opening (glass frame opening error and front frame opening error described later), and errors related to ball out and overflow (full). (Shoot ball out error and overflow error described later) are not included. Since it is possible to manually insert the game ball into the winning slot while the frame is open, the display of the bonus ratio display unit 68 is not updated, but the bonus ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls according to the type of winning winning opening is dispensed via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit determination random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display is performed. The game is a hit and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal identification information 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is converted into an open state. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a winning ball for starting a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, and the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire many game balls. NS.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game. As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the count switch. (39a) is provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. in use. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. A micro switch having a specific contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). The data bus 140 that connects the CPU unit 110 having the 111, the input unit 120 having the input port, the output unit 130 having the output port, the driver, etc., the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Will be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are used. , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining variation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure variation display games (including execution time of variation display games in various reach and variation display without reach) , Equipped with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the variation pattern tables from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. It is connected to the switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided in which a negative logic signal having a low level of 7V is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the large winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. Will be done.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and an out ball detection switch 65 that detects a game ball that has entered the out port 30b. The detection signal, the frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, and the payout busy signal are input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 has a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10, the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12 or the like, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A game is captured via the data bus 140 by taking in a signal, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24. A first input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 receives open / close data of a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b to open the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has third output ports 135-1 and 135-for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the general electric current solenoid 37c and the grand prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , 2nd driver 138b-1, 138b-2, 4th output to output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the 3rd output ports 135-1 and 135-2. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the port 136, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to the external information terminal 71 is provided. The second driver 138b-2 outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line for the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the batch display device 50. The second driver 138b-1 outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line for other display units (displays) of the batch display device 50.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, control circuit 332-334 (IORESET) that drives and controls lamps, motors, etc., as output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variable display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the large winning opening until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times or 4 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of the game is substantially increased, the normal electric power support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the Fuden support is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game is set to the second variable display time shorter than the normal first variable display time (for example). 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time-reduced state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that is a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timekeeping of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is surely performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 may be operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 may be operated from the power-on to the waiting time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (for example, twice). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A10008. Judgment (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1011). It is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier whether or not the initialization switch is turned on (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). As a validity determination, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1020). It should be noted that the area for storing information regarding the number of balls to be ejected and the number of acquired balls (for example, the area for the number of ejected balls, the area for the number of acquired balls, and the area for the number of acquired balls for each character) may be excluded from the target of the justification determination. If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 in FIG. 5B, and the process when the power is normally restored from the power failure is executed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is “Y”) (the result of A1017 is “N”). Or, if the result of A1018 is "N") and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1026 in FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on) in the area to be initialized (A1021). The area to be initialized is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Further, the region to be initialized includes a region for the number of ejected balls, a region for the number of acquired balls, and a region for the number of acquired balls for each accessory, which will be described later, and these regions are initialized by clearing 0 (initial value = 0). As a result, the number of discharged balls, the number of acquired balls, the number of acquired balls for each character, the ball output rate obtained from the number of acquired balls, and the character ratio calculated from the number of acquired balls for each character are also cleared to 0. become. In addition, it is possible to configure the area of the number of acquired balls for each character (and the ratio of the character) not to be cleared to 0. Further, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. After that, the game control device 100 examines an area in the RWM that stores the game state and determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (A1022).

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1022 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processes of steps A1023 and A1024 and shifts to the process of step A1025. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50. (Error indicator) On (lit) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1025), and step A1031 is performed. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the process of step A1026 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1026). Further, all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

The command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1025 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1030 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. The decorative special figure 1 holding number command indicating the number, the decorative special figure 2 holding number command, and the probability information command indicating the state of the probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, the recovery screen command is used when the special figure fluctuation display game is running when the power is turned off, and the customer waiting demo command is used when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , If it is initialized at power-on, the power-on command is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time reduction number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) Etc.) as an initial value (start value), which is saved in a predetermined area of RWM (A1033), and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the winning random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing).

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and sets the power failure monitoring. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process in step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1035) (A1034), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is initially executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by making it stand by by the value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1035, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. Judgment (A1038). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037, and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1039) and output off-data to all output ports (A1040).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device at the time of turning on the power (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

First, the game control device 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and further, "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

If the checksum calculation is not completed (the result of A1107 is "N"), the game control device 100 repeats the processes from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is "Y"), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number update process. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

First, the game control device 100 updates the large hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number update process is completed.

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" determines the small hit stop symbol of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number to be used. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure. It is a random number that is the initial value.

As described above, the randomness of random numbers can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1305) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1306) and random number update. Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switches 35a to 35n, and the large winning port switch 39a, and monitoring the error (front). The winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is executed (A1308).

Further, a special figure game process for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1309), and then a normal map game process for performing processing related to the normal map variation display game is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game display and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1311).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1313).

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing process. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the input process.

First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and further, bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, in the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, after that, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

The game control device 100 first reads the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1501). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and the bit is saved (stored) in the port input state of the target switch control area. ) (A1504). After that, it waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control device 100 performs a second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first data). ) Is loaded and the inversion data (second data) is saved (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits with the same state are 1 and the bits with different states are 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken and confirmed this time. Let it be a bit (A1511).

Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt are generated. The logical product with the fixed state is taken and used as the previously held bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

Then, the game control device 100 synthesizes the fixed bit this time and the holding bit last time, and saves it as the fixed state this time (A1514). Further, the exclusive OR of the previous and current fixed states is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). After that, the switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, it may not be possible to judge correctly. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The game control device 100 first outputs (reset) off-data to ports 135-1 and 135-2 (see FIG. 3) that output segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 4 (A1603). Further, the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the port 135-1 for segment output (A1608).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the touch switch signal from the touch switch (launching touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an on signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 24 is operated. When the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an on signal (the result of A1609 is "Y"), the segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and the segment output data is transferred to the segment output port 2 (A1610). Output to port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data to be output here is the segment output data for the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. As a result, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the number of ejected balls is displayed on the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate is displayed on the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is displayed. It is possible to display the character ratio.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 is for turning off the 7-segment type display (LED lamp) (LED off) when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (the result of A1609 is "N"). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). As a result, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the ejection ball number display on the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display on the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. The character ratio display is hidden.

In step A1609, instead of determining whether or not the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is on, it may be determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is in progress (customer waiting demo state). Then, when the demonstration is being held while waiting for customers, the display is executed by the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A1610, A1612), and the demonstration is being performed while waiting for customers. If this is not the case, the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may be hidden (A1611, A1612). As will be described later, when the customer waiting demo state (A3210 in FIG. 27) indicating that the customer waiting demo state (customer waiting demo is in progress) is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control device 100 produces the effect. When the customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the control device 300, it can be determined that the customer waiting demo is in progress.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1613), further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data of the launch permission (A1614), and finally synthesizes them. The data is output to the external information / launch permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, synthesizes the data, and synthesizes the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and combined with the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay board 70. The data is output (A1621). The data in step A1621 is the data on the payout rate. Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus was loaded and synthesized, and synthesized into the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay board 70. The data is output (A1622), and the output process is terminated. The data in step A1622 is the data of the accessory ratio.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas has a prize number counter for each prize ball set for each prize opening (for example, 2 prize balls, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 of step A1701, the game control device 100 is a winning number check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

When there is no count in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count number in all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1701 and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

Further, when the game control device 100 has a count number (the result of A1701 is "Y"), the game control device 100 subtracts the count number of the target winning number counter area (-1) (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of (A1705) is acquired. Then, the value in the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area as a new remaining number of prize balls (A1707). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before the process of step A1707, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, when it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711). Further, the process returns to the process of step A1708.

By the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is "N"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is in the busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (busy state). It is said that. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start the payout control. Either a state, a busy state in which payout control cannot be started immediately, or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When it is not busy, it includes an idle state and an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal status area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be started. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is "N"), the game control device 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the number of counts other than "0" is in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if it exists.

Then, when there is no count number (the result of A1715 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas It is determined whether or not the check of the count number is completed (A1717). When all the checks are completed (the result of A1717 is "Y"), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks are not completed (the result of A1717 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1715, and the processes from steps A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

Further, when the game control device 100 has a count number (the result of A1715 is "Y"), the game control device 100 subtracts the count number of the target winning number counter area (-1) (A1718), and the target winning number counter. Acquire the payout command corresponding to the area (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), the initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 can start the payout control by a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control. When indicated, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 39) are reached. A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and a payout control means (payout control means) that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means includes a payout control device 200), and the game control means gives a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. Is controlled to be transmitted to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the machine recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize is immediately awarded. The prize ball command is paid out in response to the continuous output of a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting the ball command to the payout control means. It means that it is sent to the means.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, and a game control means (game control device) is provided. The 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls, and a status signal starts payout control. When it indicates that it is possible and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is the payout. Whether or not the control means can start the payout control is specified before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled comprehensively, and based on the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 39). A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The game control means is provided with a prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits An external information output means (game control device 100) that outputs a ball signal) to the outside of the game machine is provided. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not it can be started.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the special variable winning device 39), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (payout). The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to be transmitted to the control device 200), and can store the winning information in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the predetermined winning area can be stored. By updating when the game ball is won in the prize and updating in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, the number of the prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored and external information is output. The means is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and output the prize ball signal to the outside of the game machine each time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter can store the winning information in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, updates the winning ball when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and outputs external information. By updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1804. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "Y"), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is "N"), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is "N"), the processing of step A1810 and subsequent steps is executed.

On the other hand, when the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the hit initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number region) (A1809).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1810). If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is "N"), the random number update process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the winning symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1811). Then, the next initial value of the loaded hit symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1812), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. It is targeted, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Further, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to be.

First, the game control device 100 updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (A1903). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter in which a random value is set (A1904).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, and the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is "Y"), the value remaining by masking the upper 1 byte as the addition value with the mask value of the M1 counter (the value of the M1 counter). Hereinafter, this is referred to as a “masked value”) plus “1” to set the mask update value, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

Further, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the upper 1 byte as an addition value to "0" and sets the lower 1 byte to "0". The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0" and the value does not change by adding "0".

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). Then, in the case of a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "Y"), the value of the random number region to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "N"), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and "0" is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value in the random number area to be updated. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

The game control device 100 sets a new random value by adding the added value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is "N"), the game control device 100 puts the new random number value in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A1913 is "Y"), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "N"), the random number update process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y"), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the random number area higher than the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a has a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. It serves as a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process constitutes a monitoring means that monitors the winning of each winning opening and executes a predetermined process when there is a winning. As a predetermined process, the number of ejected balls is updated by +1 (only 1 is added), or the addition process is executed for the number of prize balls due to the winning to calculate the payout rate (total number of prize balls) and the bonus ratio. There are things such as.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2001). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2002). Details of fraud & winning monitoring processing will be described later.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2003). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal electric support state, that is, whether or not it is in the time saving state or the probable change state (excluding the latent probable change state) (A2005).

Then, when the game control device 100 is in the normal electric support state (the result of A2005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2007). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2008). In this embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a. Next, the winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the normal electric support state (the result of A2005 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring (A2010). In this embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35, and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). 36a. Next, the winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2013).

FIG. 15B is a table showing the priority of winning opening monitoring for each gaming state. This priority is realized by the order of winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (FIG. 15A) and winning opening monitoring in the winning number counter update processing (FIG. 17A) described later.

Here, the winning opening monitoring is the counting of winnings, the updating (calculation) of the number of ejected balls, and the payout rate in the fraud & winning monitoring process or the winning number counter update process (also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process). It is to execute the calculation of, the calculation of the accessory ratio, and the like. In particular, even if there are prizes in the winning openings at the same time, the payout rate and the bonus ratio can be calculated with priority given to winning in the predetermined winning openings based on the predetermined priority as shown in FIG. 15B. Will be done. In the normal game state and the normal game support state, the big prize opening will not be opened unless there is fraud, so it is not added to the priority table.

As shown in FIG. 15B (I), the priority order regarding the winning opening monitoring can be changed according to the gaming state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, the winning number counter update process (which is also executed in the fraud & winning monitoring process) is performed by the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) according to the determination of whether or not the normal electric support state is set (A2005). It is possible to set (determine) which of the winning openings (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening)) that does not require fraud monitoring is to be performed first.

In particular, when the normal electric support state is in effect (the result of A2005 is "Y"), the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring for the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening). ), The winning opening monitoring (that is, counting the number of winnings, updating the number of ejected balls, adding the number of acquired balls, etc.) can be executed prior to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). As will be described later, among the winning openings having a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, the winning opening monitoring of the general winning opening 35 is prioritized before the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). Shall be executed. In addition, when it is not in the normal electric support state (the result of A2005 is "N"), that is, in the normal game state, the special game state, etc., the start prize has a prize opening switch (start opening 1 switch 36a) that does not require fraud monitoring. The winning opening monitoring can be executed for the opening 36 (first starting winning opening) before the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

As shown in FIG. 15B (II), when the general electric power support state is in progress (the result of A2005 is “Y”), among the starting prize openings of the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, the general winning opening 35 is used. If only the winning opening monitoring (winning number counter update process) is executed before the winning opening monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) is executed. The winning opening monitoring for the general winning opening 35 having a larger number of winning balls than the winning opening) can be executed with priority over the winning opening monitoring of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

In addition, in a game state other than the normal game state (special game state, normal game state, etc.), the prize opening is monitored in the order of the winning openings with the largest number of prize balls (number of prize balls). As a result, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially required, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

Further, as a modification, as shown in FIG. 15C, even if the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of FIG. 15A is deleted and the processing of steps A2010 to A2013 is executed after step A2004. good. In this case, in all the game states (independent of the game state), the winning openings with the largest number of winning balls (number of winning balls) can be obtained (large winning opening → general winning opening → first starting winning opening → The winning opening monitoring can be prioritized in the order of the second starting winning opening). In this case, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially required, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process of FIG. 15C monitors the winning of each winning opening in descending order of the number of winning balls obtained, and if there is a winning, the number of winning balls is added to the payout rate. It constitutes a monitoring means for calculating (total number of prize balls) and the ratio of prizes.

Then, after step A2009 or A2013, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (A2014). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A2014 is "Y"), the value of the ejected ball number area for storing the ejected ball number is updated by +1 in order to add only one ejected ball number (A2015). The ball ejection performance monitoring process described later is executed (A2016). Then, an out ball detection command indicating that the ball has entered the out port 30b is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). After that, the status scan counter is updated to specify in order which of the multiple switches and signals to be monitored, such as whether an error has occurred, which switch or signal is to be monitored (this time). A2018).

In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, so that the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 and counted (A2015, A2210). .. However, since the number of launching balls launched from the ball launching device is basically equal to the number of gaming balls ejected to the outside of the game area 32, a switch (sensor) that directly detects the launching balls from the ball launching device. ) May be provided to count the number of ejected balls. Since the ball launched from the ball launcher has a return to the ball launcher, the number of ejected balls is more accurate when the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch are used as in the present embodiment. You can count.

The game control device 100 updates the state scan counter (A2018) when there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A2014 is “N”). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. The gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (A2019). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2020). The details of the gaming machine status check process will be described later.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection etc. (switch error) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set. Monitoring is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2022).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2023). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2023 is "N"), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the game machine status monitoring table 3 (A2024), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The gaming machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2025).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2026). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

Since the processes from steps A2024 to A2026 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes from A2024 to A2026 are performed every 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. The fraud & winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007, and A2013 in the winning port switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 and the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. For the second starting prize opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) and the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39), forcibly open the opening / closing member using a piano wire or equipment for fraudulent use, and insert a game ball into the prize ball. Since fraud is likely to occur, in addition to detecting prizes, fraud is monitored.

First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the large winning opening switch 39a.

Then, when the fraud monitoring period is reached (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of target illegal winnings is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is determined to be the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is (for example, 5) or more (A2105).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5, for example, is that when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent the case where a prize is won or the case where noise is added to the signal to be judged as illegal, and to prevent it from being easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number is not more than the determined number (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winning determinations (A2106), and the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area. (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares the fraudulent winning occurrence flag as the fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the winning number of winning balls. The counter update process is executed (A2111). The details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the update of the notification timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is "Y"), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is one of the winning opening switches 39a, and is permitted when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the other winning opening switch 39a. Not done. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the special variable winning device 39, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the target unauthorized release command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). , Prepare an illegal prize cancellation flag as an illegal flag (A2117). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

The game control device 100 is at the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of fraudulent prizes (A2119).

Further, the game control device 100 is not the moment after the processing of step A2119 is completed or the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), that is, the fraud & winning monitoring processing before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in, the prepared invalid flag is compared with the value of the target invalid flag area (A2120).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (A2121), and the effect command is set. The process is executed (A2122). After that, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.

By the above processing, the fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fraud occurs, and the fraud release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fraud is canceled, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter update process is executed in steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A, and step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first acquires the number of winning slot switches to be monitored from the winning slot monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning slot switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all switches is completed (A2217). The table address is updated so that the target winning opening switch changes in the order of the left winning opening switch 35a, the right winning opening switch 35b, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the winning opening of the general winning opening 35. Monitoring is prioritized before the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening).

On the other hand, when the target winning opening switch has an input (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203), and loads the loaded value. Update +1 (A2204). In the winning number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 (only 1 is added) for each winning in the target winning opening, and the winning number (number of winnings) of the target winning opening is stored. Further, it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs depending on the updated value (A2205).

When the overflow has not occurred (the result of A2205 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning opening) is set (A2207). Then, the set number of prize balls is added to the value in the acquired ball number area (A2208), the set prize ball number is added to the value in the acquired ball number area for each target character (A2209), and the ejected ball number area is added. The value is updated by +1 (A2210). After that, a ball ejection performance monitoring process (described later) that calculates the ball ejection rate and the accessory ratio and controls the display of the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 is executed. do.

In the processing of steps A2204 and A2209, when the change in the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 or the starting winning openings 36, 37 in a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the winning number (Value in the winning number counter area) may not be updated by +1 and the number of winning balls may not be added to the value in the winning ball number area for each character. That is, in such a case, the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of prizes for calculating the prize ratio may be stopped for the prizes exceeding the predetermined number. With this configuration, for example, when the player cannot be properly awarded the prize ball due to the occurrence of some kind of trouble, the number of prizes is extremely increased due to the compensation process of the staff of the hall (game store). However, it is possible to appropriately calculate the bonus ratio. In addition, it is possible to prevent a malicious person from fraudulently causing a large number of game balls to be won in the general winning opening 35 or the like in a short time in order to control the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35.

In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the game control device 100 updates and counts the number of discharged balls by +1 ( A2015, A2210), a discharge ball number counting means for counting the number of discharged balls is configured. However, since the number of launching balls of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is basically equal to the number of ejected balls of the game ball ejected to the outside of the game area 32, the switch for detecting the launch ball from the ball launcher ( A sensor) may be provided, and the game control device 100 may count the number of launched balls, so that the ejected ball number counting means for counting the number of launched balls may be configured instead of the ejected ball number counting means. Since the ball launched from the ball launcher has a return to the ball launcher, the number of ejected balls can be accurately counted by using the game ball with the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch.

The game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 after the processing of step A2211 is completed or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is “Y”) (A2212). After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs depending on the updated value (A2214).

When the overflow does not occur (the result of A2214 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After the processing of step A2215 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2214 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2217).

If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2217 is "N"), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2217 is "Y"), the winning number counter update process is terminated. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information (number of winnings, number of winnings) is stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17B, the number of ejected balls area for storing the number of ejected balls, the number of acquired balls area for storing the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls, and the power-on. The area of the number of acquired balls for each character, which stores the number of acquired balls for each character, will be described. The ejected ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the acquired ball number area for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control device 100.

The number of balls won is used to obtain the payout rate. The number of balls acquired by the character is used to calculate the character ratio. The number of balls won for each winning combination is the number of winning balls for each winning opening (feature) (however, regarding the large winning opening, the big hit state and the small hit state are distinguished). In addition, when the total value (total number) of the acquired balls for each character is calculated, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize opening can be obtained. The winning combination ratio is, for example, the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the big winning opening during the big hit to the total number of winning balls for each winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the ejected ball number area is a storage area having a size of 1 byte, and is used in the present embodiment to store a value of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquired ball number area is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes and is used for storing a value of 0 to 1500.

As shown in FIG. 17B (III), the acquired ball number area for each accessory is a storage area having a size of 2 bytes, and is used for storing a value of 0 to 65535. The acquired ball number area for each accessory may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. If the upper limit is exceeded, the upper limit value (65535) is used. The area for the number of winning balls for each character is an area for storing the total number of prize balls by winning a plurality of general winning openings 35, and the total number of winning balls by winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). Area to store, the area to store the total number of prize balls by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2), the area to store the total number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening during the big hit, small Corresponds to the area that stores the total number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening during the hit (other than the big hit).

[Ball ejection performance monitoring process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ball ejection performance monitoring process. The payout performance monitoring process is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of ejected balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A2301). When the number of ejected balls is less than 100 (the result of A2301 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2313. When the number of ejected balls is 100 or more (the result of A2301 is "Y"), in order to update the payout rate displayed on the payout rate display unit 67 to the latest payout rate, the acquired ball number area (RWM). (Inside) is loaded (A2302). In the acquired ball number area, the acquired ball number (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls, that is, the ball ejection rate is stored. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (A2303).

When the number of acquired balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2303 is "N"), the game control device 100 indicates the emission color (red or green in this embodiment) of the segment (light emitting unit) of the ball ejection rate display unit 67. The value of the segment color number area (in RWM) for storing the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate%) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305). ). The segment area that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to 0. In this way, in the ball ejection rate display unit 67, the emission rate display can be updated and displayed by changing the emission color (for example, from red to green), and the player is informed that the ball ejection rate has been updated. Can be recognized.

In this way, by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305, the ball ejection rate (total of acquired balls and prize balls) is updated and displayed on the ball ejection rate display unit 67 every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number). can. If there are multiple winnings at the same time in multiple winning openings at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100, a plurality of winning openings are based on a predetermined priority as shown in FIG. 15B. The winning rate (total number of winning balls and winning balls) is calculated by adopting the winning to the winning opening with the highest priority among the winning prizes and adding the number of winning balls adopted (priority calculation means). ). As a result, especially in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, the ball ejection rate is required to be as large as possible at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. Further, in the specific gaming state (normal electric support state), since there are many prizes in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 is preferentially adopted. It should be noted that the number of prize balls due to the prizes not adopted among the plurality of prizes is added to the ball output rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls) in the ball ejection performance monitoring process in the next timer interrupt process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning openings are in the order of the winning openings with the largest number of winning balls (number of winning balls) (large winning opening → general winning opening → first starting winning opening → second starting winning opening). When the monitoring (calculation of the payout rate) is prioritized, the payout rate as large as possible is required at the timing when the number of ejected balls reaches 100, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

When the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (the result of A2303 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to the initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), and "99". The segment data for blinking display of is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the payout rate can only be displayed from 0 to 99 on the payout rate display unit 67, when the number of acquired balls (ball payout rate) becomes 100 or more in this way, "99" is blinked in only one color (for example, red). Let me. In particular, the ball output rate becomes 100 or more during the special game state (big hit), but even when the ball output rate display is updated, the color of the ball output rate display is changed to one color to prevent the color of the ball output rate display from changing frequently. In the special game state (big hit), it is possible to turn off the ball ejection rate display unit 67 to hide the ball ejection rate, but in this case, the number of acquired balls (ball ejection rate) is increased. When the payout rate display is updated at 100 or more, the color of the payout rate display may be changed.

The game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the number of acquired balls as an effect command (A2308), and executes the effect command setting process (A2309). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the ball ejection rate (number of acquired balls) on the display device 41. The command here corresponds to the ball ejection rate (number of acquired balls) (range of 1 byte) of a numerical value less than 100 displayed on the ball ejection rate display unit 67.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal data related to the ball output rate in the test signal output data area in the RWM (A2310). As a result, signal data related to the ball ejection rate is output to the relay board 70 and the external test firing test device via the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the ball ejection rate output to the test firing test device with the ball ejection rate obtained by the test firing test device. The ball output rate here may be a value of 100 or more, using the value loaded from the acquired ball number area as it is. As signal data related to the ball ejection rate, information indicating that a prize was won in a specific winning opening and data on the number of ejected balls are output as they are to an external test firing test device, and the ball ejection rate is calculated by the test firing test device. It is also possible to configure it. In addition, when the ball ejection rate is an abnormal value of a predetermined value or more or a predetermined value or less, the signal data (on signal) for notifying the abnormality is not the signal data (numerical value) related to the ball ejection rate but the signal data (on signal) for notifying the abnormality in the test signal output data area. It is also possible to save and output to the test firing test device (off signal if it is a normal value). Next, the acquired ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged ball number area is cleared to 0 (A2312).

When the game control device 100 is after step A2312 or when the number of ejected balls is less than 100 (the result of A2301 is "N"), the value of the acquired ball number area for each bonus shown in FIG. 17B (III). The total value (total number of prize balls) is calculated (A2313). Next, load the number of winning balls (big winning opening (big hit)), which is the total number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening during the big hit state (A2314), and load the number of winning balls (big winning). Based on the mouth (big hit)), (A2315) is calculated as the prize ratio (number of balls acquired for the bonus ÷ total value) × 100 (%). Here, the total value is the total number of balls acquired for each prize, and corresponds to the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize opening. The bonus ratio is calculated up to the first decimal place, but since the decimal is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the bonus ratio may be calculated.

In addition, the number of winning balls used to calculate the bonus ratio includes not only the number of winning balls (large winning opening (big hit)) but also the number of winning balls (large winning opening (small hit)). And / or the number of winning balls (ordinary variable winning device) may be included. In addition, the number of winning balls (large winning opening (small hit)) is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning opening during the small hit state, and the number of winning balls (normal). The variable winning device) is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A2316). As a result, the bonus ratio can be displayed on the bonus ratio display unit 68 via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A2315) of the accessory ratio is prepared as an effect command (A2317), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2318). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the accessory ratio on the display device 41. The command here may correspond to a value (0 to 1000) (range of 2 bytes) that is 10 times the accessory ratio.

Next, the game control device 100 saves signal data related to the accessory ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). As a result, the signal data related to the accessory ratio is output to the relay board 70 and the external test firing test device via the output process (A1622 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means, and the information related to the accessory ratio is notified (displayed). )can. Then, it is possible to confirm whether or not an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the accessory ratio output to the test firing test device with the accessory ratio obtained by the test firing test device. As signal data related to the bonus ratio, it is also possible to output the data of the number of acquired balls of each bonus as it is to an external test firing test device and calculate the bonus ratio by the test firing test device.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value in the ejected ball number region (A2320), calculates the value of (100 − ejected ball number) (A2321), and outputs the segment data corresponding to this calculation result to the ejected ball. It is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display unit 66 (A2322). As a result, the number of ejected balls is displayed in a countdown display on the ejected ball number display unit 66 via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). When displaying the count-up, the segment data corresponding to the value in the number of ejected balls region may be saved in the segment region as it is. Further, a command corresponding to this calculation result is prepared as an effect command (A2323), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2324). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the number of ejected balls by the countdown display on the display device 41. The command here corresponds to the number of ejected balls (range of 1 byte) of a numerical value less than 100 displayed on the ejected ball number display unit 66. After that, the ball ejection performance monitoring process is terminated.

As a modification, the value of the number of ejected balls, the value of the number of acquired balls, and the value of the acquired ball number area for each accessory are transmitted as data to the effect control device 300, and the ball output rate and the combination are transmitted in the effect control device 300. The object ratio may be calculated. Further, in steps A2310 and A2319, signal data relating to the payout rate and the bonus ratio, signal data notifying that the payout rate and the bonus ratio are abnormal values (values equal to or higher than the predetermined value or lower than the predetermined value), etc. Is output as an external information signal to an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the amusement store, and the information or an abnormal value regarding the ball output rate or the accessory ratio is specified. May be notified (displayed).

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is executed in steps A2020, A2022, and A2025 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 according to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2402). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2402 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-type signal, and indicates a non-touch state for a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the state on flag as the state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and prepares. (A2407). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for an error-type signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and the timer comparison value-. Keep the value at 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A2415 is "Y"), the gaming machine status check process ends.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine status check process is completed. The effect command here is either a state-off command or a state-on command. If the state-on command is an error-type command, the effect control device 300 is started to notify the error.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (the result of A2501 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502) and sets an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is "Y"), the busy state flag is prepared as the determination status (A2504), and the on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value in the busy signal state region matches the state (on / off) of the payout busy signal this time (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not match (the result of A2506 is "N"), the state of the busy signal to be paid out this time is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2509), and determines whether or not the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). When the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is "N"), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by -1 and keeps the value 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2511). , The prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

The payout busy signal check process sets the payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the payout busy signal. At this time, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is less likely to be affected by such factors.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues over the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is issued to the payout control device 200 in response to a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200, which is not transmitted to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up. The special figure game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made using the special figure game processing number to execute the game branch processing according to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG. 27.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure display, and the like. Figure Change processing is executed (A2609). The details of the processing during the change of the special figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big hit and each big hit if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit. The special figure display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A2610). The details of the processing during display of the special figure will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later in FIG. 47.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A2612), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. The details of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening will be described later in FIG. 48.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A2613). The details of the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening will be described later in FIG. 49.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). The details of the jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit middle processing, and the like. (A2615). The details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later in FIG. 54.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit middle process for setting information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process (A2616). The details of the small hit medium processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes the small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end processing (A2617). The details of the small hit residual ball treatment will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2618). The details of the small hit end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special time reduction period (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A2707. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706).

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the starting winning opening 36 is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing to right-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special drawing start opening switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). If there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a fraudulent electric power is being generated (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball is won in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal electric power generation is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

First, the game control device 100 sets information indicating that there is no start opening prize (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802), and if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

When the target switch receives an input (the result of A2802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 reads the random number latch register status (state of the random number latch register), and whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data. (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

When the target random number latch register has latch data (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and prepares the start port. The start opening winning information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the common processing of the special figure start port switch.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure of common processing for the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is in the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If the starting winning opening 36 is not won (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2916). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and the effect command setting process (A2918) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port switch common process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead (preliminary determination) process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the start opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not the starting opening winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) has won a prize (A3001). If the starting winning opening 36 is not won (the result of A3001 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A3002).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (the result of A3002 is "Y"). On the other hand, when the special figure time is not shortened (the result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the big hit determination process determines whether the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Is executed (A3004). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is used. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the player has won the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3014.

When the game control device 100 wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the jackpot is a small hit depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. The hit determination process is executed (A3009). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3014. On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. The information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes the effect command setting process (A3015). Next, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A3018). ), The effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (A3101). When the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (the result of A3101 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the processing of step A3105. In addition, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (the result of A3101 is "N"), whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed. Judgment (A3102).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the remaining balls in the large winning opening (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A3105. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not being performed (the result of A3105 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether or not the processing is being performed during the small hit. (A3103). If the small hit process is in progress (the result of A3104 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3105. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (). A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer becomes 0, the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of processing the remaining small hit balls (the result of A3104 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the process of monitoring the large winning opening switch. Further, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the processing of step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 1 (one of the large winning opening switches 39a) (A3106).

When the game control device 100 has no input to the big winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 39a). (A3110). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and the effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

When there is no input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. Further, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (A3115). If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is "Y"), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and if the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is "N"), the small It is determined whether or not the hit residual ball processing is in progress (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process, and is not in the process of processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3116 is "Y"). N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of large winning openings (A3117), and the number of large winning openings is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 ". ) It is determined whether or not it becomes the above (A3118).

When the game control device 100 does not exceed the upper limit value (the result of A3118 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. In addition, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hits (the result of A3121 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the process of monitoring the large winning opening switch and is in the process of processing small hits (the result of A3121 is "Y"). , The value of the end of the small hit opening operation is saved in the large winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). The result of (A3210) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo state (state in which the customer waiting demo is in progress).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets "0" related to the special figure normal process as the process number (A3212). A3213). On the other hand, even when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The effect control device 300 is set to display the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), the effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure normal process is terminated.

Further, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), and the decorative feature corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. The figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), the effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the missed hit flag 1 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404). The details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). The details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. The details of the fluctuation start information setting process will be described later.

Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) (for example, the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 28 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507).

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (for example, the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) of the special figure 2 blinking control timer area is saved. 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3604). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is "N"), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit judgment value is a small hit. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transfers the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. End the process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 30 for the second start storage.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A3807), and ends the jackpot determination process. do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in the high probability state (probability variation state). (A3803). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3901). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit, but it is also possible to provide the original small hit random number.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A3903), and the small hit. The judgment process is terminated.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001), and if it is a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number). ) To load the jackpot symbol random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end process described later. That is, the effect mode transition information can be used to shift the effect mode in the wake of a big hit. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the jackpot stop symbol pattern (probability variation jackpot symbol / normal jackpot symbol, etc.), so the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot symbol (type of jackpot). The transition destination of the production mode to be transitioned later will change. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the effect mode transition destination is affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (result of A4011). Is "Y"), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the effect mode can be transferred with the small hit as an opportunity. Then, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save to the area (A4017) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. The symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101), and if it is a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number). ) To load the jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end process described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special figure 2 stop symbol is saved. End the setting process.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

First, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the added value in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of out-of-order when the number of holdings is large. Therefore, in cases other than out-of-order, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of fluctuations in the first half. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure hold number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the added value in the variable distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (type of reach (including no reach)), and is later used to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than the loss, the number of holds will be distributed to the latter half fluctuation as a result. Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special map fluctuation display game. The latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (A4301), acquires an address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4302), prepares the address, and prepares the target variable pattern random number. 1 The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter half variable group table is different between the hit type and the missed type. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. Since the rate of occurrence of hits is lower than the rate of occurrence of loss and even one byte is sufficient, the size of hits is one byte from the viewpoint of saving data capacity. Therefore, at the time of hitting, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the rate of occurrence of loss is higher than the rate of occurrence of hit, and since we want to make more diverse effects appear, the size for loss is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order (A4304), and if it is out of order (the result of A4304 is “Y”), performs a 2-byte distribution process (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of place (the result of A4304 is "N"), the distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares (A4307) the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, and holds the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding). Load the variation pattern random number 2 from (for number 1) and prepare it (A4308). Then, the distribution process is executed (A4309), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (A4310). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is obtained from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the data at the head of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half variation selection table, but the latter half defining only the latter half variation selection table in which the latter half variation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the data at the head of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the selection table (second half variable group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (second half variable group table) is specified. Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value is obtained. Is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, and the process proceeds to that. Subsequent processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variable group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to create a new disturbance. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half variable selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variable selection table defined in the selection table (second half variable group table). Then, in step A4405, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), and 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sorting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or the first half variation selection table (first half variation selection table) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 is the first data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). Check if is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not need to be distributed, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, in the game control device 100, when the data at the head of the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "Y"). The data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is completed. On the other hand, if the data at the beginning of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (second half fluctuation). The first distribution value specified in the group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503, and the process proceeds to that. Subsequent processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and first half fluctuation pattern (first half) specified in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) are specified. One of the latter half fluctuation selection tables, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) is selected from the fluctuation number).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the distribution process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and an effect command setting process is performed (A4610). ). Next, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the vacant area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. A variation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change of the special figure.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special symbol 1 symbol stop command or special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701), and executes the effect command setting process. (A4702). The fluctuating symbol can be discriminated from the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variation display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal relating to the end of the variation of FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal relating to the end of the variation of FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol confirmation count signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol confirmation count signal related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). , Ends the process transition setting process during special figure change.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display processing (A2610) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure. FIG. 42A shows the first half portion of the special map display processing, and FIG. 42B shows the second half portion of the special map display processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A5101), and clears the small hit flag area of the RWM (A5102). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (A5103), the jackpot flag 1 region and the jackpot flag 2 region of the RWM are cleared (A5104).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5105), and if it is a jackpot (the result of A5105 is "Y"), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game. The test signal related to the start of (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM. Save (A5108) and set the round number upper limit table (A5109).

On the other hand, if the result of the check of the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A5105 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A5106). In a certain case (the result of A5106 is "Y"), a test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device is operating). The signal is turned on, the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A5109).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A5110). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A5112), and executes the effect command setting process (A5113). ). After that, a probability information command related to information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A5114), and the effect command is prepared. Execute the setting process (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5117).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the outside of the RWM. Save in the information output data area (A5118). In the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. The on / off of the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned off otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is turned on when it is a big hit with a ball, and turned off when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the game control device 100 determines the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability of winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game. ) Is set (A5119), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state (normal power support state) of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning opening device 39) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (A5122), and corresponds to the large winning opening opening information. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the winning slot (A5123). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 39 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It is a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A5106 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). When the small hit flag is a small hit (the result of A5125 is "Y"), the high probability fluctuation number update process for updating the high probability fluctuation number that manages the execution number of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure high probability state is performed. Execute (A5126). Subsequently, the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting is executed (A5127), and whether the special figure fluctuation display game has a high probability of occurrence of a special result (big hit) is in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not (A5128).

When the game control device 100 is not in the special map high probability (the result of A5128 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the decorative special map command from the decorative special map command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5129), and sets the effect command. Execute the process (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), an effect command setting process is executed (A5132), and the process proceeds to step A5133.

Further, when the game control device 100 is in the high probability of the special figure (the result of A5128 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5133. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure high probability (in the probabilistic state), the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is notified to the player. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to be conscious.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5133). After that, the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode when the high probability fluctuation number update process (A5135) is performed (A5135). A5136). Then, the number of remaining rotations for switching preparation (number of remaining games for switching) corresponding to the production mode number is set (A5137), and whether or not the remaining number of rotations for production (number of remaining games for production) and the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation match. (A5138). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.

When the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (the result of A5138 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets "0" related to the special figure normal processing as the processing number (A5141).

On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (the result of A5138 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the effect mode switching preparation command as an effect command (A5139). After performing the command setting process (A5140), "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A5141). The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the look-ahead effect from being performed several times before the effect mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the production across modes.

After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5142), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the processing during special figure display is terminated.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high probability fluctuation number update processing (A5126, A5135) in the processing during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (probability change state) (A5201). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A5201 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

When the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A5201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of high probability fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) (A5202), and the number of high probability fluctuations becomes 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (A5203). When the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A5203 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues even in the next special figure change display game, the high probability change number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 has a high probability notification flag when the number of high probability fluctuations becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is "Y"), that is, when the high probability state ends in the special figure fluctuation display game this time. The area is cleared (A5204), and the signal regarding the end of the high probability state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

Next, the game control device 100 turns off the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off. Is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206). It should be noted that even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (A5207), and the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A5208).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5210), and the game state display number 2 area is set to turn off the first game state display unit 57. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5127, A5136) in the process during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is other than a big hit (small hit or miss).

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a non-update code (A5401). When the next mode transition information is a non-update code (the result of A5401 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. ..

Further, in the game control device 100, when the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (the result of A5401 is "N"), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (A5403). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not 0 (the result of A5403 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5405).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and acquires the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, it is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5407), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5408). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5410). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (the result of A5410 is "Y"), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A5410 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5411). ), The effect command setting process is executed (A5412).
Next, the effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as the effect command (A5413), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5414).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number command as an effect command (A5415), and executes the effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (A5417), and if it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A5417 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5418), the effect command setting process is executed (A5419), and the effect mode is executed. The information check process ends. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching from before the specified rotation speed of the effect mode switching. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (A5124) in the processing during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing (A5501), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5502).

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal relating to the start of a big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is turned on (output by big hit + small hit), and four big hit signals are turned on (output by big hit)). Saved in the output data area (A5503), signals related to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state). The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). It should be noted that even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off. After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5505), the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (A5506), and the normal game mode flag area is set. Save the normal low probability flag (A5507).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Clear the high probability notification flag area (A5509) and save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511), and the special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the high probability state is displayed. Clear the high-probability fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (A5512). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state (general power support state) are terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the number of the effect mode 1 in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the non-updated code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, in order to save the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A5516), and to turn on the display LED (first game state display unit 57) during right-handed hitting. , The number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5517), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (A5134) in the processing during display of the special figure will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 1 during the small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 sets “7” for the small hit fanfare processing as a processing number (A5601), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5603), and turns on a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal). (Output by big hit + small hit)) is saved in the external information output data area (A5604), and the signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A5605).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area (A5606) and saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-fraud flag in the large winning opening fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A5607). Next, in order to save the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A5608) and turn on the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the game is played. The number in the right-handed state is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hit fanfare process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds (R) in the special game state (R) by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702). , Performs the effect command setting process (A5703).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the large winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires the opening switching determination value according to the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A5706). When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5706 is "Y"), the opening time of the large winning opening for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5707). When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value (the result of A5706 is "N"), the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (A5709), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5710). After that, a signal relating to the start of opening of the large winning opening (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5711), and the large winning opening is stored. Clear the information in the mouth count area (A5712). Then, the on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

In this embodiment, as the big winning opening opening information indicating the big hit pattern, the big winning opening opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), and the big winning opening Opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening), large winning opening opening information 4 (4R: all long opening), large winning opening opening information 5 (16R: all long opening), large Winning opening opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R is long opening, 9 to 16R is short opening), large winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R is long opening, 5 to 16R is short opening) is set. There is.

Therefore, in the large winning opening operation determination table, the large winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0" are displayed, and the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16" are included in the large winning opening opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching judgment value "4" are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching judgment value "4", and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching judgment value "16". , The large winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value "8" are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value "4". Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, a long opening operation is performed, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, a short opening operation is performed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening opening processing (A2612) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening of the present embodiment.

First, the game control device 100 compares the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region of the RWM, and determines whether the current round is the final round (. A5901). Then, when it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), the large winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is acquired (A5903), and the special It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A5904).

When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for short closure (for example, 1.4 seconds) as a special figure game processing timer. Save to the area (A5905), prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds as an effect command (A5907), and execute the effect command setting process (A5910).

When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (the result of A5904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area. Save to (A5906), prepare an interval command as an effect command (A5907), and execute an effect command setting process (A5910).

When the game control device 100 is the final round (the result of A5901 is "Y"), the remaining ball processing time (for the final) (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5908). An ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared as an effect command (A5909), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5910).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "5" related to the processing of the remaining ball in the large winning opening (A5911), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5912). After that, the off data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the large winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening residual ball processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening.

First, the game control device 100 compares the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region of the RWM, and determines whether the current round is the final round (. A6101).

Then, when the current round in the special game state is not the final round (the result of A6101 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the large winning opening operation determination table (A6102), and corresponds to the large winning opening opening information. The open switching determination value is acquired (A6103), and the normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (A6104).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A6105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (A6105). The result is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A6109. Further, when the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value (the result of A6105 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (step A6106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect of executing a round continuation notification effect of notifying whether or not the big hit round is continued, and notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, the big winning opening opening information showing the big hit pattern is the big winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and the big winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R are long opening, 5 to 16R are long opening). When any of (short open) is selected, a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the jackpot round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the 4th round. If the large winning opening opening information is the large winning opening opening information 2, the round continuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification production, and the large winning opening is opened with a long opening even in the 5th and subsequent rounds, and the large winning opening opening information is displayed. If the large winning opening opening information 3 is used, the round discontinuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the large winning opening is opened in a short opening in the 5th and subsequent rounds.

When the game control device 100 does not have the value of the rank-down effect system (the result of A6106 is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A6109. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is the value of the rank-down effect system (the result of A6106 is "Y"), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6109.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is "Y"), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3. 6 seconds) is set (A6108), and the process proceeds to step A6109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special figure game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and a signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is tested. It is saved in the signal output data area (A6122), and the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (the result of A6101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the special figure game mode flag that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the big winning opening opening information, and the stop symbol pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is specified. Figure Saved in the game processing timer area (A6114).

After that, the game control device 100 sets "6" as the processing number related to the jackpot end processing (A6115), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6116). After that, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (A6117), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6118). Clear the information in the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the gaming state (A6119).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for storing the upper limit value determination of the number of rounds (A6120), and stores the flag for storing the opening information determination of the big winning opening. After clearing the information in the mouth opening information area (A6121), a signal regarding the end of opening of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) (for example, turning off the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) is set in the test signal output data area. Save (A6122) and finish the processing of the remaining balls in the big winning opening.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A2614) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time reduction determination data includes the time reduction operation data (A6201). If it is not the time saving operation data (the result of A6201 is "N"), the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed (A6202), and if it is the time saving operation data (the result of A6201 is "Y"), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed. Is executed (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set in the stop symbol setting process (particularly A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. (A6205), the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves (A6207) the remaining effect rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state, and sets the effect mode after the end of the special game state. The next mode transition information of is acquired and saved (A6208).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as an effect command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6210). ), The effect command setting process is executed (A6211).

Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the special game state (big hit state), the presence / absence of the time reduction (Public electric support), and the effect mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands including information on the production mode in either "high probability / with time reduction" or "high probability / without time reduction". In this embodiment, when the big hit is completed, the probability change state is always reached (the so-called ST state is always reached). Therefore, as the probability information commands, "high probability / time saving / effect mode A" and "high probability / time reduction / effect mode" are used. There are "B", "high probability / with time reduction / effect mode C", and "high probability / without time reduction / effect mode A". Although not used in this process, there are also "low probability / no time reduction / effect mode A", "low probability / no time reduction / effect mode B", and "low probability / no time reduction / effect mode C".

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed as an effect command (A6212), and executes the effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a time reduction (Public electricity support) after the end of the big hit (A6216). If there is a time saving (Public electricity support) (the result of A6216 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A6219. When there is no time reduction (Public support) (result of A6216 is "N"), prepare a left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A6217), execute the effect command setting process (A6218), and perform the process of step A6219. Transition.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (A6219), and ends the jackpot end process.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6202) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to no time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) in the external information output data area (A6301), and signals related to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state (for example, for example). Special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on. Off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302).

Next, the number without the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (A6303), the normal figure low probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6304), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the high probability & no time saving flag (A6305). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency area (A6306), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). , In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated. ..

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6203) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time saving state (for example, turning on two jackpot signals) in the external information output data area (A6401). Since the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 variation The time reduction state signal is turned on, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6402).

Next, the number with the time saving state is saved in the game state display number area (A6403), the normal figure high probability flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6404), and the special figure is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Save the high probability & time saving flag (A6405). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation frequency region (A6406), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the big hit end setting process 2 does not make the right-handed setting.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 50.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (A6501), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6502).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned off, three big hit signals are turned off, and four big hit signals are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6503), and the big hit is hit. The end signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. (A6504).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot (A6506), and sets the effect mode transition information area. Clear the information (A6507). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag evacuation area is cleared (A6508), and the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A6509).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the ejected ball number area of the RWM to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data of the ejected ball number “00” display in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the ejected ball number display unit 66. (A6511). As a result, the number of ejected balls can be displayed as "00" on the ejected ball number display unit 66 at the end of the big hit via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the acquired ball number area of the RWM to 0 (A6512), sets the value of the segment color number area to the initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A6513), and sets the ball output rate to "00". The displayed segment data is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (for example, the red display area) (A6514). The segment area (for example, the green display area) that does not correspond to the color number is cleared to 0. As a result, the ball ejection rate can be displayed as "00" on the ball ejection rate display unit 67 at the end of the big hit via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

In the big hit state (special game state), the number of acquired balls (that is, the payout rate), which is the total number of prize balls per 100 ejected balls, is very large. Therefore, at the end of the big hit state, the number of ejected balls area (and thus the number of ejected balls) and the area of the number of acquired balls (and the number of balls to be ejected) are cleared to 0, and the number of acquired balls (that is, the number of balls to be ejected) is accurate again. I am trying to start a good measurement. Further, at the end of the big hit state, the number of ejected balls and the payout rate display are reset to "00". However, since it is more accurate to continuously measure the bonus ratio from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, the acquired ball number area for each bonus (and thus the bonus ratio) is not cleared to 0 even after the jackpot state ends. Then, the accessory ratio display is not reset and is continuously displayed before and after the big hit.

As described above, in the processing of steps A651 to A6514, at the end of the big hit (at the end of the big hit), the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total number of prize balls), the number of ejected balls, and the payout rate are displayed. Is configured to be reset and set to the initial value (here, 0 or "00").

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A2615) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit fanfare processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets "8" for the small hit middle processing as the processing number (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6702).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (A6703), and signals regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example,). The special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6704). Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39, the on-data for turning on the large winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening (A6706), and sets the small hit medium control pointer area to the initial small hit operation value (for example, "0"). ) Is saved (A6707), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit processing]
Next, the details of the small hit medium processing (A2616) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit medium processing.

The game control device 100 first loads the value of the small hit medium control pointer (A6801), and determines whether or not the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”) (A6802). .. If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (A6802 result is "N"), the small hit medium control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), the small hit operation transition setting process is executed (A6804), and the small hit operation is executed. End the hit processing.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A6805) and loads it. It is determined whether or not the flag is a flag related to the high probability of the special figure (A6806). In this way, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time is shortened.

When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets "9" for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (A6809). If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (the result of A6806 is "N"), the command of the small hit end screen is prepared as an effect command (A6807), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6807). A6808), "9" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6810). Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6811), the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (A6812), and the small hit is in progress. End the process.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit operation transition setting process (A6804) in the small hit middle process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit operation transition setting process.

First, the game control device 100 executes branch processing according to the control pointer (small hit medium control pointer) (A6901). When the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer (for example, 1500 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6902), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hit operation transition setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the control pointers are 1, 3, and 5, the game control device 100 saves the large winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A6904), and wins a large prize. The on-data is saved in the port solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hit operation transition setting process is completed.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit medium control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing. .. Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 msec closing is performed. At the end (that is, when switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 1, and at the end of the second 200 msec opening, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 2. Then, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 3 at the end of the second 1500 msec closure, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 4 at the end of the third 200 msec opening, and the small hit is performed at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. The middle control pointer is updated to 5. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit medium control pointer is updated to 6, and the small hit state ends after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec, it is closed for 2000 msec, so that the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A2617) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing the small hit residual sphere.

First, the game control device 100 sets “10” for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7202).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special figure game processing timer area (A7203), and signals regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1). (Turn off the operating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information in the large winning opening count area is cleared (A7205), the information in the small hit medium control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 is cleared) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hit end processing (A2618) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 first loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (A7302). When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A7302 is "N"), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303), and it is set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set). Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information (A7304).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A7305), acquires the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and is in the RAM. It is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (A7306), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A7307). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A7309). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A7309 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7319.

Further, when the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A7309 is "N"), the game control device 100 sends the prepared probability information command to the power failure recovery transmission command area. Save to (A7310) and execute the effect command setting process (A7311). Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7313). Further, a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7315).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (A7316), and if it is not the left-handed mode (the result of A7316 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A7319. do. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A7316 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A7317), the effect command setting process (A7318) is performed, and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to A7319.

Then, the game control device 100 loads the flag from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area (A7319), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time reduction (in the time reduction state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special time reduction (the result of A7320 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7323. If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special time reduction (the result of A7320 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (). A7321), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7322), and the process proceeds to step A7323. do.

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" for the special figure normal processing as the processing number (A7323), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A7324). The signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A7325), and the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned off) is a test signal. Save to the output data area (A7326).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A7327), clears the information in the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears the information in the special figure game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hit end process is terminated.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first reads the status of the serial transmission buffer for production (A7401). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7402 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the serial transmission buffer for effect (A7404) and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7405 is "Y"), the process returns to step A7404.

Further, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7405 is "N"), the game control device 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets the effect command. End the process.

As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows the symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special figure game process, and the symbol variation control process in the later-described normal diagram game process. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols), and setting display data of special symbols and ordinary symbols.

First, the game control device 100 checks and determines whether or not the fluctuation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (A7501, A7502). In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( The address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by -1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer changes. When it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the updated blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the initial value of the blinking control timer corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the controlled object is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value in the variable symbol number area of the controlled object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern during the fluctuation time in the batch display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 to (variable symbol number upper limit determination value -1). ) Will be updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Will be repeated to make a round of display.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are cycled. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal drawing game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the game processing timer is not 0 (A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set table of the game sequence of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the normal figure game processing number is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. The normal process for setting the information necessary for performing the process during the change of the normal map is executed (A7608). The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 64.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process (the normal map changing process). A7609). The details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Further, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit. Execution of the normal map display processing (A7610), which sets the opening time, sets the information necessary for performing the normal drawing processing, and the like. The details of the processing during display of the normal map will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during the normal drawing, or sets the information necessary for performing the processing of the remaining ball of the normal power. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). The details of the processing during normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). The details of the processing of the remaining spheres in the normal figure will be described later in FIG. 70.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). The details of the normal end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal map game process shown in FIG. 61.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. When the game state is not right-handed (A7702 result is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Upon receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing left-handed to be left-handed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved regular figures by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the number of reserved regular figures after the update. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (A7708), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "A7705". N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the Fuzu game process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, that is, whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. (A7801). Then, when it is hitting the normal drawing (the result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the count number of the updated normal electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the value of the end of operation (for example, 4) is saved by hitting the control pointer area during normal drawing (A7805).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A7805). Finally, the Fuzu game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the Fuden winning switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, if there is a winning prize of the normal power above the upper limit value during the hitting state of the normal drawing, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal drawing at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made so that the hit state of the normal figure ends in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hit by a normal figure (the result of A7801 is "N"), and when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N"). ) Or, if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "N"), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901). When the number of reserved normal figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing of the normal drawing (A7921), and the processing number is the normal drawing game processing. Save to the number area (A7922). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

Further, when the number of reserved numbers is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads a random number per RWM from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and RWM. The hit symbol random number is loaded from the normal symbol per symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A7902). Then, the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal high probability (high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal electric support state). (A7904). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7904 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7905). , When the high probability of the normal map is in progress (the result of A7904 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure is set (A7906), and step A7907 is performed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. If the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

When the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "Y"), that is, when the hit random number is missed, the game control device 100 saves the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the missing stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7910), the missing symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

When the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7908 is "N"), that is, when the hit is hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912) and converts it into the loaded hit symbol random number. The corresponding stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916), and shifts the random number storage area per normal figure. (A7917), after clearing 0 in the free space after the shift (A7918), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (A7919).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 hold of the normal figure in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of hold the normal figure is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during the normal map change (A7920), and ends the normal map normal process. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map will be described later.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process during the fluctuation of the normal map. The process transition setting process during the normal map change is executed in step A7920 in the normal map normal process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A8101), and saves the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A8102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map fluctuation time (for example, 500 msec) in the normal map game processing timer area (A8103). The fluctuation time of the normal map here is common between the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. The signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A8104), and the changing flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is changing is normally set. Figure Save to the fluctuation control flag area (A8105). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (A8106), and the initial value (initial value) in the symbol number area during the ordinary figure change. Here, "0" indicating a blank symbol) is saved (A8107), and then the process transition setting process during normal map fluctuation is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (A7609) in the normal map game processing will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number to "2" (A8301) as a setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map, and saves the process number in the normal map game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display device, in the normal map game processing timer area (A8303). ..

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal diagram (the signal during the fluctuation of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and the normal map fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (A7610) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 loads the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing of the normal drawing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of the RWM (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing (A8414). , Save the processing number in the normal map game processing number area (A8415). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit information is set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A8404) and corresponds to the normal figure stop symbol information. The hit start pointer value (here, 0, 2, or 4) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (A8405). Next, the normal power opening time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8406). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it is possible to open the device three times.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number for shifting to the processing during the normal drawing (A8407), and saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (A8408). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game (the signal related to the normal symbol 1 is turned on) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (the signal related to the normal electric accessory 1 being operated are turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, on-data is saved in the Fuden solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the Fuden solenoid (A8410).

Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 (A8411), and determines the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37. Clear the information in the area of the number of illegal winnings of the Fuden to be stored (A8412). Finally, the flag defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (A7611) in the normal map game process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the normal drawing.

First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the middle control pointer per normal figure (A8601), and the value of the loaded control pointer per normal figure is the value in the upper limit value area of the middle control pointer per normal figure (hit end). It is determined whether or not the value of) has been reached (A8602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer during normal drawing (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 controls during normal drawing. Update the pointer by +1 (A8603). Further, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process is terminated. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

Further, when the value of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (value at the end of hitting), the game control device 100 determines that (the result of A8602 is "Y"). Process during normal drawing in step A8603 The process for setting the transition to normal electric operation is executed (A8604) without executing the process for updating (+1) the control pointer area, and the process during normal drawing is terminated.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal process per figure will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal electric operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 and the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled in order to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37. The later wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8702).

Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the normal power operation transition setting process.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is any of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 corresponds to the control pointer in order to shift to the process of step A8704 and control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. The normal variable winning device 37, which is the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (for example, 1700 msec) (A8704). Further, on-data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is any of 4, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706, ends the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and processes the remaining ball of the normal electric power (A7612). Is set as the processing number "4" (A8706), and the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to set the normal power solenoid 37c to off, the off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area (A8709), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining spheres]
Next, the details of the Fuden residual ball processing (A7612) in the Fuzu game processing will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing the remaining spheres of the normal electric power.

First, the game control device 100 sets the process number "5" related to the end process per normal figure (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal figure game process number area (A8902). After that, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (A8903).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure is cleared (A8906). After that, the processing of the remaining spheres of the Fuden is completed.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (A7613) in the per-figure game processing will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per normal drawing.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "0" related to the normal drawing normal processing (A9101), and further saves the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (A9102). After that, the signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game (the middle signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Further, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and then ends the normal figure hit process. To finish.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

First, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not the output is on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking cycle of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

The game control device 100 sets the normal figure hold number display table 1 (A9203) when the output is on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), and is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). , The normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the normal figure hold display 56 (lamps D15, D16) (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both the tables 1 and 2 of the number of hold numbers, so the normal figure hold indicator 56 will not blink, but if the number of holds is 3-4, it will be normal. Since the display data of the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data of the normal figure hold number display table 2 are different, the normal figure hold indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A9206). When the output is on timing (the result of A9206 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9206 is "N"), the special figure 1 hold is set. The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A9210). When the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9210 is "N"), the special figure 2 is held. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 hold is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And save it in the segment area of the round display unit 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), and the like is defined (the game control device 100). A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display unit (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

First, in the game control device 100, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2), that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not the magnetism is detected (A9301).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A9301 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 detects abnormal magnetism, the game control device 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism by +1. It is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has timed up (A9303).

The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A9303 is "Y"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time (the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared). A9304), the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A9305).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet fraud generation flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A9307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value in the magnet invalid flag region (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not turned on (the result of A9301 is "N"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected. (A9308). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A9310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (the result of A9303 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A9309.

The game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the fraud notification period Is completed, or if the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for ending the magnet fraudulent notification is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (A9313).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet invalid flag does not match the value in the magnet invalid flag area (the result of A9313 is "N"), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (A9314), and the effect command is set. The process is executed (A9315). After that, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

First, in the game control device 100, the radio wave sensor 62 is turned on, that is, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A9401 is "Y"), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (for example, 60 seconds). A9402).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command for notifying the board radio wave fraud as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud generation flag indicating that the board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A9401 is "N"), that is, when the game control device 100 does not detect an abnormal radio wave, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the fraud notification period Is completed, or if the fraudulent notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for ending the radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A9409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave invalidity flag is saved in the board radio wave invalidity flag area (A9410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A9411). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 75A shows the first half part of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the second half part of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1305), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313). Performs processing such as creating information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). When the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the off data of the security signal is the external information output data. Save to the area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y") or the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a door. The on-data of the frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A9508). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like (A1029 in the main process). Then, the security signal control timer is timed from the time of RAM initialization.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the process of step A9510. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). When the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electric wave fraud is occurring (A9513). When the fraudulent electric service is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the fraudulent prize opening is occurring (A9514). In addition, when the fraudulent prize occurrence flag for the big prize opening is saved in the fraudulent flag area, it can be determined that the big winning slot fraud is occurring. When the big winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y") and the panel radio fraud is occurring (the result of A9511 is "Y"), the frame radio fraud occurs. If it is inside (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the fraudulent signal is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if the fraudulent prize opening is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y"). Y ”), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9516), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9517). Depending on the on-data setting of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

After steps A9515 and A9517, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9518). The details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the start port (A9519). The details of the start port signal editing process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9520). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9521). When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (the result of A9521 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is output as external information data. Save to the area (A9522) and end the external information editing process.

Further, when the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9521 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 uses the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal as external information. Save to the output data area (A9523) and end the external information editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.

First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0. (A9603).

Then, when the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is not 0 (the result of A9603 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal by -1 (A9604), and outputs the main prize ball signal. The initial value (for example, 128 msec) of the main prize ball signal output control timer is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (the result of A9603 is "Y"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9608), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is "N"), whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section. (A9606). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec) or more.

When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (the result of A9606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs on-data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save to the data area (A9607). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A9606 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is the external information output data of the RWM. Save to the area (A9608) and end the main prize ball signal editing process.

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port signal editing process. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (A9703). When the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is "N"), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (A9704), and the start port signal output control is performed in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value of the timer (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the on-data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the start port signal editing process.

Further, when the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (the result of A9703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the external information of the RWM. It is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section. (A9706). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more.

When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (the result of A9706 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the on data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM. Save to (A9707) and end the start port signal editing process.

Further, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (the result of A9706 is "N"), the game control device 100 outputs off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device in the RWM. It is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B1001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B1002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal (operation of the operation means such as the effect button 25) by the player or the person concerned with the game store (hall) is executed. (B1010). Further, in the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and the effect on the display device 41.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B1011). Production points are added. Production points are added when the production or operation to be added is executed. Also, at the end of the game so that the production points can be carried over to the next game, for example, information on the production points. Information including the above can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B1012), analyzes a received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B1013). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the content (effect) to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The process is executed (B1014). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "N"), the processing of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B1017). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a bonus operation effect.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B1020 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. After that, the processes from B1008 to B1020 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the details of the received command check process (B1013) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 78) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 80 below. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 79) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a procedure of reception command analysis processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. NS. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and includes variable commands (A4608 and A4609). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the jackpot command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during the jackpot. For example, a fanfare command (A5116), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5907), and the like. The ending command (A5909) and the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the jackpot command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include decorative special symbol commands (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 includes a command related to the number of ejected balls (A2323 in FIG. 18), a command corresponding to the ball ejection rate (number of acquired balls) (A2308 in FIG. 18), and a command corresponding to the calculation result of the bonus ratio (A2308 in FIG. 18). A2317) in FIG. 18 may be received as an effect command (single-shot command), and display setting processing for displaying the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio may be performed in the single-shot command process. The effect control device 300 may back up (store) the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio in FeRAM 323, which can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure.

In addition, in the one-shot command processing, the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the following processing. When the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command, a RAM initialization setting process for notifying RAM initialization or the like is executed. When the MODE unit represents a command for power failure recovery or a customer waiting demo command, the power failure recovery setting process for power failure recovery and the customer waiting demo setting process for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like are executed. .. When the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command or the decorative special figure 2 hold number command, the special figure 1 hold information setting process or the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed. When the MODE unit represents a probability information command, the probability information setting process is executed. When the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command, error / invalid setting processing for notifying or canceling the error / invalid notification is executed. As the error / illegal command, for example, there are an illegal occurrence command (A2108), an illegal release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). When the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode, the effect mode switching setting process is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (A3014). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N") (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Display screen layout example]
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a layout example of the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41.

The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharge ball number display unit 691 for displaying the number of discharged balls, a ball ejection rate display unit 692 for displaying the ball ejection rate, and a bonus ratio display unit 693 for displaying the bonus ball ratio. .. In FIG. 81, the values of 57, 36, and 59.3 are displayed for the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio, respectively.

It should be noted that even if the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio are always displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, it is an obstacle. For example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to the display of the front frame opening error), the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio may be displayed.

In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) that accepts operations by the player, etc., the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, the display / non-display of the bonus ratio can be switched, and the number of ejected balls can be selected by the player. , You may be able to select whether to display the payout rate or the bonus ratio. Further, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), it may be possible to select whether to display the countdown or the countup of the number of ejected balls on the display device 41 by selection by the player or the like. The selection may be performed by displaying the options on the display device 41 as a menu and operating the operation means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

Further, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. The latest (latest) number of ejected balls, ball ejection rate, and accessory ratio may be displayed during the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, but in this case, the display size is displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is made larger than in other cases, it can appeal to visitors to non-gaming game stores.

The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the left area 610a has a first special symbol, and the right area 610b has a second special symbol. In the middle region 610c, the third special symbol is variablely displayed (in FIG. 81, the stop symbol is displayed). The number of ejected balls display unit 691, the payout rate display unit 692, and the accessory ratio display unit 693 are provided on the upper side of the variable display area 610, but are not limited thereto.

Further, the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio may be hidden or the display size may be reduced if they interfere with the variable display of the variable display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41. It may be displayed or the display size may be increased only when the variable display is stopped and the stopped symbol is displayed.

Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbol) are variablely displayed. When a movie-type reach effect is performed in the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced pattern may be variablely displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, in the variable display area 615, the decorative reduced pattern may be displayed in a variable manner at all times. The variable display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The large decorative special symbol in the variable display area 610 and the small special symbol in the variable display area 615 may have similar figures or may be completely different.

The hold display 633 (start memory display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (start memory display unit) is from the special figure 1 hold information set from the decoration special figure 1 hold number command and the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. The screen is drawn based on the set special figure 2 hold information (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 indicates a hold (starting memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. As the hold display 633, the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display are displayed side by side in the hold display unit 630 in the order of winning (the order in which the hold occurs).

On the hold display unit 630, spherical (circular) hold display 633s are displayed in a manner of arranging them on a slanted gutter 635 with the left side lowered. Further, the hold correspondence display 633a (changed hold display) corresponding to the hold (hold during digestion) related to the running special figure change display game is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 imitating the frame of the globe (frame). As the Earth within). The hold display 633 displayed on the hold display unit 630 moves from the left side of the gutter 635 to the hold digestion area 640 each time the special figure variation display game starts.

Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, there is a special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 that displays the special figure 1 hold number numerically, and a special figure 2 hold number display that displays the special figure 2 hold number numerically. A unit 660 is provided.

The navigation character 670 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41. The navigator character 670 is usually arranged so as to be adjacent to the hold correspondence display 633a (hold digestion area 640) indicating the hold during digestion. In addition to the main body 670a, the navigation character 670 includes a character name display portion 670b and a meter display portion. Further, in association with the navigation character 670, the dialogue (which may be a dialogue notice) that the navigation character 670 appears to emit is displayed on the dialogue display unit 680. It should be noted that the dialogue may be output not only as a voice but also as a voice. In addition, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio may be displayed according to the operation on the screen of the Navichara 670 (the Navichara 670 moves to display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio). (Perform a display-like effect).

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the payout control means (payout control device 200, etc.), the game ball is in a winning area (general winning opening 35 or starting winning opening 36) or a variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 37). When a prize is won in the device 39), it is possible to pay out a prize ball having a number of prize balls determined for each prize area and the variable prize device. The display means (feature ratio display unit 68, display device 41, etc.) is the ratio (role) of the total number of prize balls paid out to the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize device. Object ratio) can be displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning device (an impression that many open states occur), which is a motivation (index) for the player to continue playing the game.

The counting means (game control device 100 or the like that executes the processing of steps A2015 and A2210) is the number of discharged balls, which is the number of game balls discharged from the game area, or the number of game balls launched into the game area. Count the number of fired balls. The display means (ball ejection rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) can display the ratio (ball ejection rate) of the total number of prize balls obtained by winning to the number of ejected balls or the number of launched balls. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the general winning opening 35. And it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The display means (discharged ball number display unit 66, ball ejection rate display unit 67, accessory ratio display unit 68, display device 41, etc.) provides the ejected ball number, ball ejection rate, etc. when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state. The accessory ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the customer waiting state, the display means may display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio. This is a privilege for the player during the game, and the operation of the game machine 10 can be increased.

The display means (ball ejection rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) is the total number of prize balls obtained by the predetermined number of game balls each time the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be easily displayed as the total number of prize balls. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in and interested in the general winning opening 35, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The calculation means (winning opening switch / game control device 100 that executes the status monitoring process, etc.) is used when any one of the winning areas and the variable winning devices wins at the same time when the number reaches a predetermined number. The total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls obtained by winning one of the plurality of prizes based on the priority determined for the area and the variable winning device. Therefore, in particular, in the normal game state and the special game state other than the normal game state, the total number of prize balls as large as possible (ball ejection rate) is reached at the timing when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. ) Is required, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

The calculation means (winning port switch / game control device 100 that executes the state monitoring process, etc.) is a winning area for which the number of prize balls is added according to whether or not a specific game state (general power support state) has occurred. The priority of (each winning area or variable winning device) can be changed. Therefore, in the specific gaming state (Public electric support state), since there are many prizes in the normal variable prize device 37, the prize in the normal variable prize device 37 is preferentially adopted, and the total number of prize balls can be calculated.

The reset means (game control device 100 or the like that executes the process of steps A651 to A6514) can reset the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) and set it to the initial value at the end of the special game state. .. In the big hit state (special game state), the total number of prize balls is very large, but after the big hit state is over, the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) can be accurately measured. In addition, the reset means is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize device to the total number of prize balls paid out at the end of the special game state (feature ratio). Do not reset and keep it as it is. As a result, the bonus ratio can be accurately measured regardless of the jackpot state (special game state).

The game information output means (game control device 100 or the like that executes output processing) can output information on the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) and information on the bonus ratio to an external device. Therefore, is there a discrepancy between the total number of prize balls output to an external device such as a test firing test device (ball ejection rate) and the total number of prize balls obtained by the external device (ball ejection rate)? You can check it.

When the monitoring means (winning opening switch / game control device 100 that executes the status monitoring process, etc.) monitors and monitors each winning area and the winning to the variable winning device in descending order of the number of winning balls obtained. If there is a prize in, the total number of prize balls is calculated by adding the number of prize balls in the prize. Therefore, the total number of prize balls (ball output rate) as large as possible is preferentially required, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, in addition to the ejected ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 for which display control is executed by the game control device 100, display control is executed by the payout control device 200. A discharge ball number display unit 851, a ball ejection rate display unit 852, and an accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided on the batch display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 as in the first embodiment. The ejection ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. Not limited to this, the discharge ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853, which are displayed and controlled by the payout control device 200, may be provided in the upper plate unit. In this way, when the discharge ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 or the precision plate unit, the game board 30 is replaced with another game board. However, since it can be used as it is without being discarded, it leads to cost reduction.

Further, the ejected ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are the same as the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68, respectively. It is composed of (2 or 3) 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point part) display (LED lamp, display device).

FIG. 82 is a back view of the gaming machine 10. On the back surface of the game board 30, a game control device 100 (main board) that collectively controls the game via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control device 100 is arranged via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. An effect control device 300 that controls the display device 41 and the like based on the effect control command transmitted from the display device 41 and the like is arranged. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 that covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper part of the back surface of the game control device 100 is provided. When the game board 30 configured in this way is housed in the storage portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 project to the rear of the front frame 12. do.

At the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a storage unit 750 for storing the game balls replenished from the replenishment device (not shown) provided in the island facility and for aligning and flowing down the stored game balls is arranged. .. A payout unit 790 that pays out the game ball flowing down from the storage unit 750 to the upper plate 21 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on one inner portion of the front frame 12.

Further, on the lower part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on the data transmitted from the game control device 100, and a game ball based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24 are placed. A ball launching device 742 for firing, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices are arranged.

The ejection ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are arranged on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200 (payout control board), and the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate. Unlike the display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68, it can be visually recognized only from the back surface side of the gaming machine 10. The ejected ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 are not shown to general players and are visible only to those involved in the game store (employees, etc.). The number of ejected balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

If you do not want to show the display of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio to a general player, the ejected ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory on the front of the gaming machine 10. The ratio display unit 68 can be omitted. In this case, the display of the number of ejected balls, the ejection rate, and the accessory ratio is confirmed by the ejected ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853 only from the back surface side of the gaming machine 10. can.

Further, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the total number of prize balls), and the bonus ratio based on the payout command, and the payout control device 200 is provided with the payout control device 200. Display control is performed to display on the ball number display unit 851, the ball output rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853. It should be noted that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out ball detection command (A2017) in units of one winning to the winning opening (winning area). The payout control device 200 receives the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and the payout control device 200 is provided with the payout control device 200 to display the number of ejected balls 851 and the payout rate. It is also possible to display on the unit 852 and the accessory ratio display unit 853.

The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and like the game control device 100, it has a discharge ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls and the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (award). The memory has an acquired ball number area for storing (total number of balls) and an acquired ball number area for each accessory that stores the acquired ball number for each accessory (see FIG. 17B). The calculation method of the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (the total number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the bonus ball ratio is the same as that of the first embodiment. The out ball detection command is used to update the number of ejected balls by +1.

FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of a payout command (payout number command). The payout command consists of 1 byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (first bit) is an out ball flag indicating that the ball has entered the out slot 30b, and the second to fourth bits have won a prize in the winning slot. In some cases, the winning opening information for specifying the winning opening is shown, and the 5th to 8th bits indicate the number of winning balls as it is. As for the winning opening information of the 2nd bit to the 4th bit, "001" is the general winning opening 35, "010" is the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36), and "011" is the normal variable winning opening device 37 (starting opening). 2), "100" indicates a big winning opening (winning during a big hit), and "101" indicates a big winning opening (winning other than during a big hit such as a small hit). When the out ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when there is a ball entering the out port 30b, the number of prize balls is 0. Similar to the first embodiment, the total number of prize balls is stored in the acquired ball number area, and the total number of prize balls for each winning opening is stored in the acquired ball number area for each character as the number of acquired balls for each character. NS.

For example, when the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal, the 10 prize balls by winning the general winning opening 35 is "1AH", and the 3 prize balls by winning the starting opening 1 is "23H", and the start is started. The 2 prize balls by winning the mouth 2 are "32H", the 14 prize balls (big hit) by winning the big prize mouth are "4EH", and the 14 prize balls by winning the big prize mouth (14 prize balls) The small hit) is "5EH", and the notification by out-ball detection (out-ball detection command) is "80H".

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the first embodiment are obtained, and the discharge ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory are arranged on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200. The ratio display unit 853 makes it possible to visually recognize the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio even from the back surface side of the gaming machine 10.

[Other variants of the first embodiment and the second embodiment]
It is also possible to modify the first embodiment and the second embodiment as follows.

As shown in FIG. 84, the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 controlled by the game control device 100 are not on the front surface of the game machine 10, but on the back surface of the game machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming machine 10 is provided. It is visible only from the back side of. In this case, the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 can also be shown only to the persons concerned (employees, etc.) of the game store without showing them to general players. .. If the number of ejected balls display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are arranged on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, there is a possibility that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine 10 will not be spoiled for general players. be. Further, the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are installed on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. Since the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is sealed (because it is crimped) so that it cannot be opened inside the case, the number of ejected balls display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit. It is not possible to cheat on the display of 68.

The number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio are displayed on the batch display device 50 on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 (the number of ejected balls display 66, the payout rate display 67, and the bonus ratio display unit 68). And the display unit (ejection ball number display unit 851, ball ejection rate display unit 852, accessory ratio display unit 853) provided on the payout control device 200 on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, and the display device 41, not all of them, 1 It may be displayed on only one or two. Further, the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio may not be displayed, but at least one may be displayed. That is, any one of the ejected ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 may be omitted, or the ejected ball number display unit 851, the ball ejection rate display unit 852, and the accessory ratio display unit 853. Either of may be omitted. Further, by increasing the number of 7-segment type displays (LED lamps), as the accessory ratio display unit 68, the first display unit that displays the continuous accessory ratio and the so-called accessory ratio that is generally used (the so-called accessory ratio) It is also possible to provide two with a second display unit for displaying the total bonus ratio) and simultaneously display both the continuous bonus ratio and the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio). Further, by pressing the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) (A1016) to turn it on, the accessory ratio display unit 853 may be able to alternately display and switch between the total accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. ..

Further, a common display in which four 7-segment type displays are arranged in the horizontal direction is provided without separately providing the number of ejected balls display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68. It is also possible to provide only one and display the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio. In such a common display, each time the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is turned on, it is possible to sequentially switch whether to display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, or the accessory ratio. In this case, the common display displays any one of the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio together with the identification code (alphabet, etc.) indicating what is displayed. For example, the number of ejected balls is displayed as "h55", the ball ejection rate is displayed as "d30", the total bonus ratio is displayed as "y50.8", and the continuous bonus ratio is displayed as "r58.4".

Further, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio are stored as information inside the microcomputer (CPU) of the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 and the payout control device 200, and the display unit and display of the game machine 10 are displayed. The device 41 does not display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio at all, and simply outputs (or displays) the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the accessory ratio to an external device (test firing test device, etc.). (Of course, the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio may be output to an external device while being displayed on the display unit or the display device 41 of the gaming machine 10).

Further, the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio are determined by a user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In addition to the calculation, the CPU itself of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 is provided with a calculation function (hard calculation function), and parameters are set in the internal registers ( The number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ratio may be automatically calculated by launching (discharging) a game ball, setting information each time a prize is detected, and the like). Then, the number of ejected balls and the number of balls ejected calculated by a hardware calculation function (calculation means) from the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 to an external device (inspection device 500, etc.). The rate and the accessory ratio may be output.

As a privilege when the total number of ejected balls from the power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) or when the number of executions of the variable display game from the power-on exceeds the predetermined number (for example, 100). It may be configured to display the payout rate and the accessory ratio. By doing so, there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine will increase immediately after the opening of the gaming store, and it is possible to display an accurate ratio of the accessory.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the bonus ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. It may be calculated for the number of prize balls acquired in the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times). For example, the predetermined period is a period related to one big hit (from the normal game state before the big hit to the end of the big hit) and a period related to one consecutive chan (renso) (probability change from the normal game state before the big hit). (Until the time reduction (electric support) is completely completed), the bonus ratio may be calculated separately for each such predetermined period.

The effect control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total of the number of acquired balls and the number of prize balls), and the bonus ratio by itself. You may. In this case, the effect control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio in FeRAM 323, which can retain the stored contents even in the event of a power failure. By doing so, the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and the accessory ratio can be displayed on the display device 41 immediately after the power failure is restored (after the power is turned on). Further, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the calculation method of the accessory ratio displayed on the display device 41 is switched by the selection by the player or the like, and the effect control device 300 is selected. The accessory ratio may be calculated according to the calculation method and displayed on the display device 41. As mentioned above, the calculation method of the bonus ratio is based only on the percentage of the prize balls obtained by winning the big prize opening during the big hit state with respect to the total number of prize balls. It depends on whether or not the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the large winning opening in the small hit state is included.

In addition, the number of acquired balls (number of prize balls paid out) is 100 as one set (1 unit), and the number of balls acquired by the character (the number of balls acquired by the character) in each set and the number of balls acquired by the winning openings other than the character. It is possible to save (the number of winning balls) in the ring buffer and use it to calculate the winning combination ratio and the payout rate. The bonuses here are the special variable winning device 39 (large winning slot) and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning slot), and the winning slots other than the bonus are the general winning slot 35 and the starting winning slot 36. (1st start winning opening). The ring buffer cannot be cleared to prevent fraud, and the number of acquired balls is always accumulated regardless of the time or the number of special figure fluctuation display games. Depending on the number of winning balls and the number of winning slots stored in the ring buffer, the winning ratio and the payout rate can be flexibly calculated for each predetermined period and the predetermined number of winning balls (payout prize balls).

As a storage form, both the number of winning balls and the number of winning opening winning balls may be stored in a ring buffer as a set (block) of, for example, 1 byte each for a total of 2 bytes. In addition, since the other can be calculated by subtracting one of the number of winning balls and the number of winning openings from 100, only one of the number of winning balls and the number of winning openings is stored in the ring buffer. good. Further, as the number of winning balls for the winning combination and the number of winning balls for each winning opening, the number of acquired balls for each winning combination (see FIG. 17B) may be stored in the ring buffer.

The ring buffer may be provided in a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory mounted on any one of the game control device 100 (main board), the payout control device 200 (payout board), and the effect control device 300 (sub board). This eliminates the need to specially back up the number of balls acquired for the character and the number of balls acquired for the winning opening. The size of the ring buffer is, for example, 600 sets. Assuming that the number of balls launched per minute by the ball launcher is about 100 and the ball ejection rate is 100%, 100 prize balls (1 set) are paid out per minute, so if the ball launching device is 600 sets, the ball ejection rate is 100%. It is possible to save the number of acquired balls for about 10 hours.

If there is a vacancy in the ring buffer, it may be notified to that effect. The display device 41 for effect may display on the screen indicating that there is a vacancy in the ring buffer to notify the user. This notification may be performed only during the game (other than the customer waiting state), the customer waiting state, or the hall setting mode. Further, the batch display device 50, the game control device 100, or the like may be provided with a dedicated LED to perform notification by lighting or blinking. Instead of providing a dedicated LED, the existing LED may be notified in a lighting mode (color or blinking) different from the usual one. Free information indicating that there is a vacancy in the ring buffer may be transmitted as a test firing test signal or an external information signal and displayed on the test firing test device or an external device to notify that there is a vacancy in the ring buffer. In addition, the notification may be performed by the voice of the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 99. In addition, the configuration common to the first embodiment or the second embodiment can be applied to the configurations other than those described below.

In the third embodiment, the bonus ratio (total bonus ratio (so-called bonus ratio) and continuous bonus ratio) is displayed on the display device 41 at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and / or the reduced working hours end timing. Will be done. In addition, as for the bonus ratio, the value divided for each special game (big hit) consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds (value measured by resetting each time the special game ends) is included in the big hit history information related to the special game and saved. , It can be included in the jackpot history information and displayed on the display device 41.

[Ball ejection performance monitoring process of the third embodiment]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ball ejection performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). It should be noted that the steps having the same contents as the ball ejection performance monitoring process of FIG. 18 have the same step numbers and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step A2313, the game control device 100 calculates the total value (total number of prize balls) of the values of the acquired ball number regions for each accessory shown in FIG. 17B (III), and then determines the number of acquired balls for each accessory. Load from the area of the number of acquired balls for each character (A9801). The number of balls acquired for each character here is the total number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening during the big hit, the total number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening during the small hit (other than the big hit), normal. It is the total number of prize balls by winning a prize in the variable winning device 37 (starting port 2).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates (A9802) as the bonus ratio (number of bonus balls ÷ total value) × 100 (%) based on the number of bonus balls acquired. Here, as the bonus ratio, the so-called continuous bonus ratio (ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big prize opening during the big hit state (%)) and the so-called bonus ratio generally used. (Ratio of all prizes: Ratio (%) of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the ordinary variable winning device 37) is calculated. When calculating the continuous bonus ratio, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the big prize opening during the big hit is used as the number of winning balls. When calculating the ratio of all prizes, the total number of prize balls won by winning the big prize opening during the big hit, and the prize by winning the big prize opening during the small hit (other than the big hit) The sum of the total number of balls and the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is used (total). Here, in addition to the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, the big prize opening ratio (the prize obtained by winning the big winning opening during the big hit state and the small hit state among all the prize balls). You may calculate the ratio of other prizes such as the ratio of the number of balls).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the calculation result of one of the calculation results of the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the bonus ratio display unit 68, so that the segment data corresponding to the calculation result of the one is displayed. , Save in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the accessory ratio display unit 68 (A9803).

Then, the game control device 100 currently determines whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (A9804). Here, the jackpot end timing can be set in various ways as long as it can be recognized that the jackpot state (special game state) has ended. For example, the jackpot end timing is determined to be the final round by the remaining ball processing (FIG. 49) of the big winning opening after the remaining ball processing time (for final use) has elapsed (A5908) (the result of A6101 is "Y"). ), It may be the timing (at the start of the ending) when the processes of steps A6112 to A6122 are executed. Further, the jackpot end timing may be during the ending or at the end of the ending, that is, at the time when the ending time (A6114) has elapsed.

When the jackpot end timing is currently reached (the result of A9804 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio as an effect command (A9802). A2317), the effect command setting process is executed (A2318).

As a result, at the timing when the special gaming state ends (big hit end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio (so-called bonus ratio) on the display device 41. In the special gaming state (big hit state), the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio change significantly due to the opening of the special variable winning device 39 (big winning slot), so the bonus here. Displaying the ratio only confuses the player and is wasteful. Therefore, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are displayed at the end timing of the big hit immediately after the big change.

When the game control device 100 is not currently the jackpot end timing (the result of A9804 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently the high probability end timing or the reduced working hours end timing (A9805). Here, the high-probability end timing or the time-saving end timing (specific game state end timing) can be set in various ways as long as it can be recognized that the high-probability state or the time-saving state (general electric support state) has ended. In the case where the probability change state is always reached (so-called ST state) as in the first embodiment, the high probability end timing and the time saving end timing are the same timing, for example, the number of high probability fluctuations is It becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is "Y"), and it is the timing when the processes from steps A5204 to A5211 are executed. In addition, unlike the first embodiment, in a model having a time saving state (normal power support state) with a low probability, a time saving end timing different from the high probability end timing exists.

When the game control device 100 currently has a high probability end timing or a reduced working hours end timing (the result of A9805 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio. Prepare as a command (A2317) and execute the effect command setting process (A2318).

As a result, at the timing when the specific gaming state ends (high probability end timing or shortened working hours end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio (so-called bonus ratio) on the display device 41. .. It should be noted that, during the specific gaming state, the change in the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio becomes larger than in the normal gaming state due to the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) by the Fuden support. Even if the ratio of is displayed, the player is only confused and there is a lot of waste. Therefore, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are displayed at the end timing of the specific game state immediately after the significant change.

If the game control device 100 does not currently have a high probability end timing or a reduced working hours end timing (the result of A9805 is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to step A2319 without executing the processes of steps A2317 and A2318.

When the payout performance monitoring process is executed by the above processing (when a prize is awarded), the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are always calculated, and the jackpot end timing, high probability end timing, and At the time reduction end timing (timing immediately after the bonus ratio changes significantly), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the display device 41. In addition, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio may be displayed on the display device 41 only at any one of the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the reduced working hours end timing.

When the jackpot end setting process 1 (FIG. 51) is executed, the latent probability changes state with high probability and no time reduction (without normal electric support), but after the jackpot ends, the latent probability changes state and the special figure variation display of a predetermined number of times. When the game is executed, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio may be prepared as an effect command (A2317), and the effect command setting process may be executed (A2317). A2318).

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the ball ejection performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment.

In FIG. 86, the order of steps A9804 and A9805 and steps A2313 and A9801-A9803 is exchanged, and the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are set only at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing. Calculate (A9802), prepare a command corresponding to the calculation result as an effect command (A2317), and execute the effect command setting process. In FIG. 86, when the ball ejection performance monitoring process is executed, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are not always calculated, and the calculation load is reduced.

As described above, the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio are calculated at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the reduced working hours end timing (timing immediately after the bonus ratio changes significantly), and the effect control device 300 Can display the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the display device 41. The continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41 only at any of the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the reduced working hours end timing.

[Special figure of the third embodiment, normal processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 according to the third embodiment. The special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is executed by the game control device 100 in step A6219 of the jackpot end process (FIG. 50). It should be noted that the steps having the same contents as the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 of FIG. 53 have the same step numbers and the description thereof will be omitted.

At the end of the big hit, in steps A6510 to A6514, the game control device 100 clears (reset) the ejected ball number area and the acquired ball number area to 0, and initially displays the ejected ball number and the ball ejection rate ("00"). ”).

Next, the game control device 100 clears (reset) 0 all the acquired ball number areas for each character (A6515), and displays the segment data of the initial display "00.0" of the character ratio as the character ratio display unit 68. It is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of (A6516). As a result, the bonus ratio can be displayed as "00.0" on the bonus ratio display unit 68 at the end of the big hit via the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11).

In addition, every time the special game (big hit) ends, all the acquired ball number areas for each character are cleared to 0, so the acquired ball number area for each character is at the end of the previous special game (first special game). Before the end, the number of prize balls from (when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on) is stored. Therefore, the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) calculated by step A9802 and the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) transmitted to the effect control device 300 by step A2318 are , The bonus ratio divided for each special game consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds (the bonus ratio measured by resetting for each special game). That is, the prize ratio divided for each special game (big hit) is from the end of one special game (from the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game. Alternatively, it is a winning combination ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls in the period until the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state).

The rules require that the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) be less than or equal to the standard value (for example, 60% for continuous bonus ratio and 70% for all bonus ratio). The ratio of prize balls to the number of prize balls in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present is not stable unless the operating time of the gaming machine 10 is long. For example, if a special game (big hit) occurs during a short operating time and the bonus ratio exceeds the standard value, the player indicates that the bonus ratio to the number of prize balls in the entire period shows an abnormal value. There is a possibility that it will be misjudged.

On the other hand, it is known in advance that the bonus ratio divided for each special game is an unstable value and can be a value far from the reference value. Therefore, by calculating the bonus ratio divided for each special game from the beginning and displaying it on the display device 41 instead of the bonus ratio for the entire period, the players and the like can themselves other than the reference value. It is necessary to judge whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on the knowledge and information of the above, and the number of erroneous judgments is reduced.

As in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (without steps A6515 and A6516) of FIG. 53 is executed, and the game control device 100 uses the power source of the game machine 10. It may be configured to calculate the bonus ratio with respect to the number of prize balls (number of acquired balls) in the entire period from the input to the present. Further, in the RWM, an area for accumulating and storing the number of acquired balls for each accessory in the acquired ball number area for each accessory is provided corresponding to the acquired ball number area for each accessory, and the game control device 100 is used for the game. The bonus ball ratio to the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the machine 10 to the present may be calculated together with the bonus ball ratio divided for each special game (big hit).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing according to the third embodiment. The one-shot command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80).

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command when the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N") (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and a single-shot command process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a command for recovering from a power failure when the MODE section does not represent a command for RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"). (B1305). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command when the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N") (the result of B1305 is "N"). B1307). Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (A3207). (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE section issues the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (A3203). It is determined whether or not it is represented (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command when the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N") (the result of B1313 is "N"). B1315). As the error / illegal command, for example, there are an illegal occurrence command (A2108), an illegal release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). Then, when the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed (B1316). Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (for example, the effect of A5139). It is determined whether or not it represents the mode switching preparation command) (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE unit counts the command (A3107, A3111 large winning opening count). It is determined whether or not it represents a command) (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents a count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command process is terminated. The details of the count information setting process will be described later.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent the count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then the MODE unit corresponds to the information regarding the prize ball (the calculation result of the bonus ratio of A2317). It is determined whether or not it represents the command to be executed (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents information about the prize ball (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the bonus ratio setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated. The details of the accessory ratio setting process will be described later.

If the MODE unit does not represent information about the prize ball (the result of B1321 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1323). ). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1324).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1324 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1325), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1326), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1326, the game state flag is set to the normal state as an example, but the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit" depending on the timing when this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1323 is "N"), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1324 is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Count information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the details of the count information setting process (B1320) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 88) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a procedure of count information setting processing executed by the effect control device 300. The count information setting process counts the number of balls acquired in the special game state, and is executed when the MODE unit represents a count among the commands received as single-shot commands.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received count command (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B1401). If the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the current gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot operation (big hit state) (the jackpot state). B1402).

When the jackpot operation is in progress (the result of B1402 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the count number during the current round by +1 and adds the number of winning balls to the number of winning balls (the number of prize balls in the big winning opening). Here, 14) is added (B1403, B1404). At the end of the big hit ending, the number of balls won will be cleared to 0. The acquired number of balls is stored in the number of balls to be output area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the update of the number of balls to be output (B1405), and ends the count information setting process. As the number of balls to be played, the number of balls to be won is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

On the other hand, if the received command is not normal (the result of B1401 is "N"), or if the current gaming machine 1 is not in the jackpot operation (the result of B1402 is "N"), the count information setting process is performed. finish.

[Character ratio setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the accessory ratio setting process (B1322) in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 88) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the accessory ratio setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The bonus ratio setting process saves the total bonus ratio (so-called bonus ratio) and the continuous bonus ratio, and sets the display of these. The effect control device 300 sets the information about the prize ball as a single-shot command ( It is executed when the command) corresponding to the calculation result of the accessory ratio of A2317 is received.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the command of the information regarding the received prize ball is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is "N"), the accessory ratio setting process is terminated.

When the command is normal (the result of B1501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (B1502). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (the result of B1502 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B1505. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total bonus ratio (the result of B1502 is "Y"), the total bonus ratio is saved in the RAM (B1503), and the total bonus ratio is displayed on the display device 41. (B1504).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous accessory ratio (B1505). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the continuous bonus ratio (the result of B1505 is "N"), the bonus ratio setting process is terminated. When the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous bonus ratio (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the continuous bonus ratio is saved in the RAM (B1506), and the continuous bonus ratio is displayed on the display device 41. (B1507) is executed, and the accessory ratio setting process is terminated.

In addition, the ratio of all winnings and the ratio of continuous winnings received at the end timing of the big hit are included in the RAM as one set together with the number of balls acquired at the end timing of the big hit (the final number of winning balls during the big hit). For example, it is stored in the jackpot history area (in RAM 322) (B1503, B1506). In the jackpot history area, jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, jackpot history 3, ... Are stored in the order of jackpots generated from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, and all the characters are stored for each jackpot history. The ratio, the ratio of consecutive characters, and the number of balls won are stored as a set. Further, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are displayed on the display device 41 as a jackpot history at the jackpot end timing according to the display settings (B1504, B1507). The prize ratio displayed at the end timing of the big hit is from the end of one special game (when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game (big hit). It is a bonus ratio calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the period.

Further, in the RAM, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received at substantially the same timing at the high probability end timing and the reduced working hours end timing are stored in association with each other as one set (pair). Further, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are simultaneously displayed on the display device 41 at the high probability end timing and the time saving end timing by the display settings (B1504, B1507). The bonus ratio displayed at the high probability end timing or the reduced working hours timing is the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of the previous special game to the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or shortened working hours state). It is the bonus ratio calculated for the ratio.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the details of the symbol-based command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The symbol-based command process is executed in step B1210 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area in the RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type includes an out-of-order symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the like.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the details of the variable command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The variable command process is executed in step B1206 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when the symbol system command of the jackpot symbol is received even though the variable system command of the deviation is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, the game state is updated by -1 (B1907). Then, the number of special map fluctuations is updated by +1 (B1908), and the variable command processing is terminated. The number of special figure fluctuations is the number of executions (starts) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, and the number of special figure fluctuations after the update is the special figure in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). It is saved in the fluctuation count area.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the details of the jackpot command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The jackpot command process is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure of jackpot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the jackpot command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect is executed (B2102). .. The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 is set to during fanfare (B2103), and the jackpot command process is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents a round when the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 is executed. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the round (B2105, B2106), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 is executed. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the jackpot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the jackpot command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 has an effect corresponding to the bonus ratio and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot. The point addition effect display is set as the effect display when adding points (B2111). In the point addition effect display, for example, a character is made to appear on the display device 41.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect corresponding to the accessory ratio (all or continuous bonus ratio) (B2112), and is currently The ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2113), and the jackpot command process is terminated. The ending effect may be set according to the final number of balls to be won.

If the MODE section of the received jackpot command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the jackpot command process without executing any process. do.

[Production point control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the effect point control process according to the third embodiment will be described. The effect point control process is executed in step B1011 in the main process (FIG. 78). FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect point control process executed by the effect control device 300. The production points include possession points, which are the cumulative total of points earned from past games to the present, and points earned during the game, which are points earned during the current game (predetermined period).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the look-ahead effect of the effect point target (target to which the effect point is given) has been executed (B2501). The look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on a look-ahead symbol command and a look-ahead variable command, such as a continuous effect (continuous notice), a hold change notice, and a look-ahead zone notice. When the look-ahead effect of the effect point target is not executed (the result of B2501 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step B2504. When the look-ahead effect for the effect points is executed (the result of B2501 is "Y"), the points corresponding to the effect are added to the number of owned points (B2502), and the points corresponding to the effect are added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2503).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variable effect of the effect point target has been executed (B2504). Here, the variation effect is an effect (notice effect, etc.) related to the result of the special figure variation display game currently being executed. When the variable effect of the effect point target is not executed (the result of B2504 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step B2507. When the variable effect of the effect point target is executed (the result of B2504 is "Y"), the points corresponding to the effect are added to the number of owned points (B2505), and the points corresponding to the effect are added to the number of points acquired during the game. (B2506).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the input condition for the effect point is satisfied (B2507). When there is an effect button operation for the effect point to which the effect point is given, it is determined that this input condition is satisfied. When the input condition to be the effect point target is not satisfied (the result of B2507 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2510. When the input condition for the effect point is satisfied (the result of B2507 is "Y"), the points corresponding to the input (here, the effect button operation) are added to the number of owned points (B2508), and the number of points earned during the game is added. Add points corresponding to the input (here, the effect button operation) (B2509).

After that, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the addition timing at the ending of the big hit (B2510). If it is not the addition timing at the ending of the big hit (the result of B2510 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2513. If it is the addition timing at the ending of the jackpot (the result of B2510 is "Y"), the number of points owned has the bonus ratio (both the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio) and the winnings in this jackpot. Add points corresponding to the number of balls (B2511), and correspond to the number of points earned during the game, the bonus ratio (both the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio), and the number of balls earned in this jackpot. Add points (B2512).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the character level-up condition is satisfied with respect to the number of points acquired during the game (B2513). For example, when the number of points earned during the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it can be determined that the character level up condition is satisfied. If the character level up condition is not satisfied (the result of B2513 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2516. When the character level up condition is satisfied with respect to the number of points earned during the game (the result of B2513 is "Y"), the character level (Lv) corresponding to the character mode (for example, costume) is updated (B2514), and the character mode is changed. The drawing setting of the character level-up effect related to the level-up (mode change) is set (B2515). The character level-up effect may be the level-up of the above-mentioned navigation character 670, or may be used for level-up of a character other than the navigation character 670.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the point restoration condition by inputting the password is satisfied (B2516). The password input is, for example, input by operating the effect button 25, and the password can be acquired by a mobile terminal (mobile phone or the like) by a mobile terminal interlocking service. The point recovery condition is, for example, that the password is correct. If the point revival condition is not satisfied (the result of B2516 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2519. When the point revival condition is satisfied (the result of B2516 is "Y"), the number of owned points is set to the value corresponding to the password content (B2517), and the character level (Lv) corresponding to the password content and the effect customization information are set. Is restored (B2518). The production customization information is information for each model.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation for drawing the two-dimensional code on the display device 41 (B2519). For example, the two-dimensional code drawing operation is a predetermined operation (operation on the touch panel, pressing operation, etc.) of the effect button 25. When there is no two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2519 is "N"), the effect point control process is terminated. When there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2520 is "Y"), a password is generated based on the number of owned points, character Lv, and production customization information (B2520), and the two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password Make drawing settings (B2521). After that, the effect point control process is terminated.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010) according to the third embodiment in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 78) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device 300. By processing the hall / player setting mode, the hall setting mode in which the staff of the hall (game store) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or the player setting mode in which the player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is in progress (B2701). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is in effect (the result of B2701 is "Y"), the processing of B2706-B2716 is performed, and the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) is operated by a staff member of the hall (game store). Make various settings and adjustments based on.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B2701 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B2702). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in progress (the result of B2702 is "Y"), the processing of B2720-B2725 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B2702 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2703). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal by the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for a customer, it can be determined that the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. The term "waiting for customers" means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting state for customers, and includes a demo state for waiting for customers such that a video for waiting for customers (demo for waiting for customers) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is "N"), the process of B2717 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y”). Set the start (B2704). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B2705).

Next, the effect control device 300 is a hall volume adjustment process (B2706) that adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the hall staff or the like, the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B2707) for adjusting the LED brightness of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B2708) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving for setting power saving. The setting process (B2709) is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issuance color and the like of the logo accessory (B2710). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B2711). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B1009), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been performed. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2711 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting is confirmed by the factory setting when the setting confirmation operation input is received (the result of B2711 is “Y”) (B2712). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory. If it is not confirmed by the factory setting (the result of B2712 is "N"), the process proceeds to B2714. When the factory setting is confirmed (the result of B2712 is "Y"), the factory setting process for performing various settings and adjustments in the factory setting is executed (B2713). The factory default setting is the default setting stored in the memory such as ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined by B2706-B2710 and B2713 are written to the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B2714).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B2715). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B2716).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2717). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for a customer. The term "waiting for customers" means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting state for customers, and includes a demo state for waiting for customers such that a video for waiting for customers (demo for waiting for customers) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2717 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2717 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode (the result of B2717 is “Y”). B2718). By drawing this screen, the menu display for making various selections and the accessory ratio (continuous accessory ratio and total accessory ratio) can be changed to the volume adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for volume adjustment, and LED brightness adjustment. It is displayed on the display device 41 together with the brightness adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for the purpose. Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B2719).

Next, the effect control device 300 includes a player volume adjustment process (B2720) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. The player LED brightness adjustment process (B2721) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process for customizing (individually setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B2722). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B2723). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B2724). Then, the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (B2725). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined by B2720-B2721 may be erased, so that the data is not written to the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode shall be performed by the effect button input process (B1009).

[Screen transition]
96A and 96B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order in the third embodiment, and are examples of screen transitions of the entire game.

(A) of FIG. 96A is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure variation display game. In the plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), the missed stop symbol of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed. Further, the reserved digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen.

In the third embodiment, the hold display unit 630 (start memory display unit) displays the first hold display unit 630a for displaying the first start memory as the first hold display (first start memory display), and the second start memory. It is composed of a second hold display unit 630b to be displayed as a second hold display (second start storage display). Three hold displays 633 are displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display unit 630a. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b. The hold display 633b (black) is a hold display whose color has changed from the normal mode due to the hold change notice.

The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 have the numbers "3" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. The indicated number "0" is displayed.

(A) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure variation display game. An effect is performed such that the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640. After that, the hold correspondence display 633a (holding display during change) indicating the hold related to the running special figure change display game (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Will be done. Then, the variation of the decorative special symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variable display area 610, and at the same time, the variation of the decorative reduced symbol (↓↓↓) starts in the variable display area 615. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650, the number indicating the special figure 1 hold number is reduced to "2". When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the stop result (stop symbol) of the fluctuation display area 615 and the fluctuation display area 610 is in a common mode (common number), but in the case of a deviation, It does not have to be a common aspect.

After that, in (c), the same decorative special symbol (identification information) is stopped in the left region 610a and the right region 610b, and reach occurs. Then, after various reach effects are executed, in (d), the stop symbol of the big hit is displayed, and thereafter, in the special game state (big hit state), the special variable winning device for a predetermined number of rounds (here, 16 times). By repeating the opening and closing times of 39, the round game is executed for the predetermined number of rounds.

(E) shows the display screen of 8R in the middle of the big hit state (special game state). Here, the jackpot round effect is performed, and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot state (B1404, B1405 in FIG. 89) is updated and displayed every time a prize is awarded to the jackpot. (F) shows the screen of the final round (16R).

FIG. 96B (g) shows the display screen of the display device 41 during the ending at the end of the jackpot state. During the ending, as the jackpot history, the number of balls acquired during the jackpot, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received by the effect control device 300 at the jackpot end timing are displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. There is. The jackpot history display unit 760 includes a bonus ratio display area 800 for displaying the bonus ratio. In addition, since the total bonus ratio is a so-called bonus ratio that is generally used, it is displayed as "feature ratio". The prize ratio displayed here was obtained during the period from the end of one special game (before the end of the first special game, when the power of the game machine 10 was turned on) to the end of the next special game (big hit). Although it is a bonus ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls, it may be a bonus ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game.

Further, as for the jackpot history (history information), the latest three (here, jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, jackpot history 3) are displayed, but how many jackpot histories are displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. Can be set by the player in the player setting mode. The jackpot history (number of balls won, ratio of all winnings, ratio of continuous winnings) is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if it overlaps, it is displayed preferentially on the front side. It is also possible to display the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in a pie chart or a bar graph instead of a number.

Further, as a point addition effect when adding effect points according to the number of balls acquired during the big hit and the bonus ratio, for example, the character 770 is made to appear on the display device 41 and the dialogue display of the character 770 is displayed. In the unit 770a, the number of balls to be won and the added value of the production points (here, 100 points) are displayed. The character 770 and its form may be set according to the added value of the effect points (and by extension, the number of acquired balls and the bonus ratio).

Further, as an ending effect (B2112 in FIG. 93) executed during the ending, an effect (decoration) in which a shooting star flows is displayed. The ending effect (including the background) may be set according to the information related to the prize ball such as the number of balls won and the ratio of the characters. By directing according to the character ratio, it becomes possible to judge the character ratio and the state of the gaming machine, and the interest of the game is improved. In the ending effect, the LED (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the center case 40 of the game board 30 is colored according to the accessory ratio (for example, "green", "yellow", "blue"). It may include a decorative effect that emits light (in order, the proportion of the accessory decreases). In addition, the lower the bonus ratio, the greater the number of special figure fluctuation display games that have been digested by the big hit, so in order to aim for labor, an ending effect that gives a good impression to the player is set. good. In addition, the larger the number of balls obtained, the better the ending effect may be set to give a good impression to the player in order to praise. It is also possible to set an effect other than the ending effect (for example, a variable effect) according to the accessory ratio.

(H) shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH" occurs after the end of the big hit state. In (K), the special figure 1 special figure variation display game or the special figure 2 special figure variation display game is executed in the specific gaming state. One hold display 633 is displayed as the first hold display on the first hold display unit 630a. The second hold display unit 630b displays two hold displays 633 as the second hold display.

(E) shows the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH". The total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received by the effect control device 300 at the end timing of the specific game state (high probability end timing or shortened working hours end timing) are displayed in the bonus ratio display area 800. The end timing of the specific gaming state is, for example, the timing at which the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes zero. The bonus ratio displayed here is a bonus ratio calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the end of one special game to the end of the specific gaming state. It may be a bonus ratio calculated for the number of prize balls obtained during the entire period from the power-on to the end of the specific gaming state. Further, at the end timing of the specific game state, the effect according to the bonus ratio may be executed.

In addition, since the total bonus ratio is a so-called bonus ratio that is generally used, it is displayed as "feature ratio". The total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or even if they overlap, they are displayed preferentially on the front side. It is also possible to display the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in a pie chart or a bar graph instead of a number. After that, it shifts to the normal game state.

FIG. 97 corresponds to (g) of FIG. 96B and shows another example of the display screen of the display device 41 at the ending at the end of the jackpot state. In FIG. 97, in addition to the number of balls acquired, the total bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio, the number of starts, which is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, (special feature of B1908 in FIG. 92). The number of fluctuations in the figure) is displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. As a result, the player or the like will determine whether or not the bonus ratio is an abnormal value based on the number of starts other than the reference value, and erroneous determination will be reduced. For example, if a big hit occurs when the number of starts is small (for example, 10 in FIG. 97), the bonus ratio exceeds the reference value (for example, 60% for the continuous bonus ratio and 70% for the total bonus ratio). However, it can be judged that it is not abnormal.

In this case, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio received at the jackpot end timing are in the RAM (for example, in RAM 322) as one set together with the number of balls acquired and the number of starts at the jackpot end timing. It is saved in the jackpot history area (B1503, B1506).

Further, in FIG. 97, since the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be unfamiliar to the player, the navigation character 670 appears and the dialogue display unit 680 is continuous with the total character ratio. The explanation and definition of the character ratio are displayed. As a result, the player becomes interested in the character ratio.

Also in FIG. 96B (ko), it is added to the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH". The number of starts may be displayed in the accessory ratio display area 800.

[Display screen waiting for customers]
FIG. 98 shows an example of a display screen in the player setting mode (B2718 in FIG. 95) waiting for a customer. The jackpot history is displayed on the jackpot history display unit 760. The continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio (displayed as "feature ratio") are displayed in the bonus ratio display area 800 in the jackpot history display unit 760. The volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for adjusting the volume and the brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) for adjusting the LED brightness are displayed on the display screen.

The effect control device 300 displays the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for customers (waiting for customers), and is in a state other than waiting for customers, that is, waiting for customers. In the state where the demonstration is not in progress or the game ball is being launched, the continuous accessory ratio and the total accessory ratio may not be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, it is also possible to omit B1504 and B1507 of the accessory ratio setting process (FIG. 90).

Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, as a menu display, a first selection unit 820 for selecting the number of jackpot history to be displayed and a second selection unit 825 for selecting the display content (display mode) of the accessory ratio are displayed. ing. How many of the jackpot history (set of acquired number of balls, total bonus ratio (feature ratio), continuous bonus ratio, start number) stored in the jackpot history area in the RAM by the first selection unit 820. You can select whether to display the jackpot history (three in FIGS. 96B, 97, and 98). The second selection unit 825 can select whether to display the total bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, or both.

The player performs a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction (movement of a touch portion) on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, and selects a target to be set. By this touch operation, an item (setting item) to be set to be displayed in a specific display mode (see the black frame of the volume adjustment display 810) such as a highlight display is selected. That is, the items displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display are changed by the touch operation. The highlight items in the first selection unit 820, the second selection unit 825, and the like as menu displays are updated by the effect button input process (B1009). It should be noted that the volume and brightness values are selected (B2720 and B2721 in FIG. 95) by the touch operation by the movement of the finger in the left-right direction (movement of the touch portion). Further, by touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b, the displayed value or the selection of the character may be confirmed (B2723 or the like in FIG. 95). Further, the LED 690 section of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

As described above, in the player setting mode in which the customer is waiting, the player can select the display number of the jackpot history and the display content (display mode) of the bonus ratio by the menu display. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for customers, the volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) and the brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) are displayed, and the volume and brightness can be adjusted to the player's preference.

[Sub-display device]
FIG. 99 shows a game board 30 provided with a sub-display device 830. In the above, an example of displaying the total accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the like on the display screen of the display device 41 is shown, but as shown in FIG. 99, all of the sub-display devices 830 (movable accessories) that can operate are displayed. It is also possible to display the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. The operation of the sub-display device 830 (movable accessory) is controlled by the effect control device 300 as the board effect device 44.

In the normal position, the sub-display device 830 is housed in the space behind the upper effect unit 40c and most of it cannot be visually recognized in the front view. It is visible. Then, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time saving end timing, the effect control device 300 operates the sub display device 830 to the operating position, and the sub display device 830 determines the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio. indicate. Therefore, at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the reduced working hours end timing, the player pays attention to the continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio displayed on the sub display device 830.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
In the third embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the prize ball to the effect control means (effect control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the variable prize device among the total number of prize balls paid out by the payout control means (payout control device 200, etc.). The bonus ratio, which is the ratio occupied by the display means, can be displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). The information related to the prize balls is the calculation result of the prize ratio itself, the information for calculating the prize ratio (the number of prize balls that is the basis of the prize ratio), and the like.

Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning device, easy to win a prize in the general winning opening 35, etc.) by the display regarding the bonus ratio. In addition, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning device (an impression that many open states occur), which is a motivation (index) for the player to continue playing the game. Furthermore, when the bonus ratio is low, there are relatively many prizes in the general prize opening 35, etc. Therefore, by displaying the bonus ratio on the display means, the player is also interested in the general winning slot 35. The interest in the game will improve.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display the history information (big hit history) related to the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). In this case, it is possible to include in the history information and display the bonus ratio divided for each special game consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds. Here, the bonus ratio divided for each special game includes the bonus ratio measured by resetting each time the special game ends.

Therefore, by calculating the bonus ratio (which is known in advance to be an unstable value) divided for each special game, instead of the bonus ratio for the entire period, and displaying it on the display means. Players and the like are urged to judge whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on their own knowledge and information other than the reference value, and misjudgment is reduced.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) may generate a specific game (high probability state or time saving state) during a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. .. Further, the game control means (game control device 100) calculates the bonus ratio, and uses the calculated bonus ratio as information regarding the prize ball, and when the special game or the specific game is completed, the effect control means (effect). It may be transmitted to the control device 300). In this case, the bonus ratio can be displayed at the timing immediately after the bonus ratio changes significantly (the timing when the special game or the specific game ends). Further, when the calculated bonus ratio is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as it is and displayed on the display means, the number of transmissions from the game control means (game control device 100) to the effect control device 300 is the minimum. The limit is reached and the transmission load is reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. The configurations other than those described below can be the same as those of any of the first to third embodiments.

The fourth embodiment is based on the third embodiment, but unlike the third embodiment, the effect control device 300 has a payout command (FIG. 101) (payout command (A1719) and an out ball detection command (A2017). ) Is received, and the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) is calculated by itself. Further, the effect control device 300 may calculate (count) the total number of prize balls and the number of winnings of the general winning opening 35, or may calculate the general winning opening ratio. The general prize opening ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls). Of the ball ejection performance monitoring processes of FIG. 85, the process of transmitting the calculation result of the accessory ratio to the effect control device 300 (steps A9804, A9805, A2317, A2318) is unnecessary, and therefore is not executed in the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a discharge ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an acquired ball number area for each accessory according to the fourth embodiment. The ejected ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the acquired ball number area for each accessory are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control device 100. The area of the number of ejected balls and the area of the number of acquired balls are the same as those in FIG. 17B of the first embodiment. An area for storing the total number of prize balls due to winning the prize in the mouth 35 and an area for storing the total number of prize balls for winning the general winning mouth 35 on the right are provided. As a result, the game control device 100 can calculate (count) the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 separately on the left and right sides.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a payout command according to the fourth embodiment. The payout command according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 101) is different from the payout command of FIG. 83 of the second embodiment, and there are two types of payout commands by winning the general winning opening 35 corresponding to the left and right general winning openings. be. For example, in the winning opening information, "000" indicates the left general winning opening 35, "001" indicates the right general winning opening 35, and the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal as the winning of the left general winning opening 35. The 10 prize balls are "0 AH", and the 10 prize balls by winning the right general prize opening 35 are "1 AH".

In the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command of FIG. 101 not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. In step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), the game control device 100 prepares not only the payout command to be transmitted to the payout control device 200 but also the payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the effect command. In the payout command transmission process, the effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed. Similarly, in step A2017 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (FIG. 15A), the game control device 100 not only sends an out-ball detection command to the payout control device 200, but also an out-ball detection to send to the effect control device 300. The command is prepared as an effect command, and then the effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. A MODE unit indicating that the information is about the prize ball is added to the payout command and the out ball detection command transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 stores the number of acquired balls for each accessory acquired from the payout command (FIG. 101) in the RAM as in FIG. 100 (III). For example, in RAM 322).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The one-shot command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). The same process as the one-shot command process (FIG. 88) according to the third embodiment is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The information regarding the prize ball of FIG. 102 according to the fourth embodiment is the payout command of FIG. 101 transmitted from the game control device 100, and the information regarding the prize ball of FIG. 88 according to the third embodiment is useful. It is different from the command corresponding to the calculation result of the ratio.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE unit does not represent the symbol stop command (the result of B1323 is "N"), whether or not the MODE section represents the high probability fluctuation count command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation count. Is determined (B1327). When the MODE unit represents a high-probability fluctuation count command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes high-probability (time saving) end processing (B1328), and ends the single-shot command processing. When the MODE unit does not represent the high probability fluctuation number command (the result of B1327 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing as it is.

[Character ratio setting process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The accessory ratio setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1322 of the one-shot command process (FIG. 103).

In the bonus ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 has a bonus in the area of the number of acquired balls for each bonus in the RAM of the effect control device 300 based on the number of prize balls indicated in the payout command. Add and accumulate the number of acquired balls. Then, in addition to the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio, the left and right general winning opening ratios are calculated and saved. The bonus ratio setting process is executed when the effect control device 300 receives a payout command (FIG. 101) as information regarding the prize ball.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received payout command (FIG. 101) is a normal command (B3001). If the payout command is not normal (the result of B3001 is "N"), the bonus ratio setting process is terminated. When the payout command is normal (the result of B3001 is "Y"), the number of acquired balls for each bonus corresponding to the payout command (that is, the winning opening information indicated in the payout command) in the RAM of the effect control device 300. The number of prize balls indicated in the payout command is added to the value of the area (B3002). Next, the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the values of the acquired ball number regions for each bonus and stored in the total bonus ratio region and the continuous bonus ratio region in the RAM (B3003).

In addition, when the number of winning balls for each character (the number of prize balls for each character) is added to and accumulated in the area for the number of acquired balls for each character during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, the effect control device 300 is used. It is possible to calculate the bonus ratio to the number of prize balls (number of acquired balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the area of the number of acquired balls for each character (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is cleared (reset) to 0 every time the special game (big hit) ends, the effect control device 300 is set to the previous special game. It is possible to calculate the bonus ratio in the period from the end to the present (from the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 calculates the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio from the values of the acquired ball number areas for each of the left and right general winning openings, and the left general winning opening ratio in the RAM. Store in the area and the right general winning opening ratio area (B3004). Here, the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio are the ratios of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the left and right general winning openings 35 among the total number of winning balls, respectively. In addition, the total number of prize balls is the total of the values in the number of acquired balls area for all the characters.

The effect control device 300 can calculate the general winning opening ratio in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When each time the special game (big hit) ends, if all the acquired ball number areas for each character (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) are cleared to 0, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. (Before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on) The general winning opening ratio in the period up to the present can be calculated.

Further, in step B3004, the general winning opening ratio may be calculated by adding the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio. Furthermore, in addition to the ratio of the left and right general winning openings, the winning opening ratio of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening is calculated and saved in the corresponding area in the RAM. You may. Here, the winning opening ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning a prize in the corresponding winning opening among the total number of winning balls.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the area of the number of acquired balls for each winning combination to which the number of prize balls is added in step B3002 is for the prize balls of the left or right general winning opening 35 (B3005). ). That is, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the left or right general prize opening 35. If the added winning ball number area for each winning combination is not for the winning ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is "N"), that is, if there is no winning in the left or right general winning opening 35, the winning combination The object ratio setting process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the added winning ball number area for each bonus is for the prize ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “Y”), that is, the left or right general winning opening 35 If there is a prize, the value of the acquired ball number area for each winning combination added in step B3002 is displayed and set (B3006). Here, the added winning ball number area for each winning combination is the winning ball number area for the winning ball of the left general winning opening 35 when the left general winning opening 35 has a prize, and the right general winning opening 35. When there is a prize in the mouth 35, it is the area of the number of acquired balls for each prize ball of the right general prize mouth 35. The added value of the acquired ball number area for each bonus is the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 on the left or right. Even if only one of the general winning openings 35 has a prize, the value of the acquired ball number area for each of the general winning openings 35 may be displayed and set. Further, here, not only the total number of prize balls of the left or right general winning opening 35, but also the number of winnings to the left or right general winning opening 35 or the number of winnings to all general winning openings 35 is counted. It is also possible to configure the display settings.

As a result of the above, when the number of prize balls is added to the value in the area of the number of acquired balls for each character for the general prize opening 35, at least the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 that has won this time. The total (number of acquired balls) can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub-display device 830 of FIG. 99).

The effect control device 300 can display the total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When each time the special game (big hit) ends, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game when the area for the number of acquired balls for each character (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) is cleared to 0. (Before the end of the first special game, from the time when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on) The total number of prize balls of the general winning opening 35 in the period up to the present can be displayed.

Subsequently, the effect setting for producing the effect corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 35 is executed (B3007), and the bonus ratio setting process is completed. As an effect corresponding to winning a prize in the general winning opening 35, an LED (board decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 emits light, a sound is output from a speaker, and a movable accessory (board effect device 44) is produced. ) Works. By this production, the interest of the game can be enhanced, and the player's interest in the general winning opening 35 increases.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300 is also added when the winning ball number areas for each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening 35 are added. The value of the acquired ball number area for each object may be displayed and set. As a result, the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls) of each winning opening can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub-display device 830 of FIG. 99).

Further, in the accessory ratio setting process, the effect control device 300 may also calculate the number of ejected balls and the payout rate based on the payout command. In this case, the effect control device 300 has a discharge ball number area for storing the number of discharged balls and an acquired ball number area for storing the total number of prize balls (acquired ball number) in the RAM. The number of ejected balls corresponds to the number of times the payout command (FIG. 101) is received, and the payout rate is the ratio (ratio)% of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls.

Further, the effect control device 300 may back up the calculation result (value of the acquired ball number area for each bonus, the bonus ratio, the general winning opening ratio, etc.) in the FeRAM 323 in the bonus ratio setting process.

[High probability (short working hours) end processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure of high-probability (time saving) end processing according to the fourth embodiment. The high-probability (short-time) end process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1328 of the one-shot command process (FIG. 103).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received high probability fluctuation number command is a normal command (B3201). If the high-probability fluctuation count command is not normal (the result of B3201 is "N"), the high-probability (time saving) end processing is terminated. When the high probability fluctuation count command is normal (the result of B3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the high probability fluctuation count is 0 (B3202). In this embodiment, the number of high-probability fluctuations is also the number of time-saving fluctuations.

When the number of high-probability fluctuations (number of time-saving fluctuations) is not 0 (the result of B3202 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the high-probability (time-saving) end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the number of high-probability fluctuations (number of time-saving fluctuations) is 0 (the result of B3202 is "Y"), the display setting of the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratios. Is executed to end the high-probability (time saving) end processing. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio.

In this way, the effect control device 300 always calculates the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left / right general winning opening ratio every time the payout command is received, and the high probability end timing. Further, at the time reduction end timing, the display device 41 and the sub display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a procedure of jackpot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The jackpot command process is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). The steps having the same contents as the jackpot command processing (FIG. 93) of the third embodiment have the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit of the jackpot command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the jackpot command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 has an effect corresponding to the bonus ratio and the number of balls acquired during the jackpot. The point addition effect display is set as the effect display when adding points (B2111).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the final number of winning balls as a set of jackpot history together with the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratios, and the jackpot in the RAM. Save in the history area (B3401). Then, the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect is executed (B3402). In the ending effect setting process, as a part of the ending effect, the display of the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left / right general winning opening ratio is also executed. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio. The ending effect may be set according to the final number of winning balls, the winning combination ratio, and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

In this way, the effect control device 300 always calculates the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and total bonus ratio) and the left / right general winning opening ratio every time the payout command is received, and the jackpot end timing (ending). ), The display device 41 and the sub-display device 830 can display the accessory ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio.

The effect control device 300 calculates the bonus ratio and the left / right general winning opening ratio only at the jackpot end timing, the high probability end timing, and the reduced working hours end timing, and the bonus is displayed on the display device 41 and the sub display device 830. It is also possible to display the ratio and the ratio of left and right general winning openings.

[Screen transition]
106A and 106B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series in the fourth embodiment, and are examples of screen transitions of the entire game. FIGS. 106A (a)-(f) and 106B (g)-(ko) correspond to FIGS. 96A (a)-(f) and 96B (ki)-(ko), respectively, and are therefore described below. It is the same as FIG. 106A and FIG. 106B except for the configuration.

In FIG. 106A (c), since the left general winning opening 35 has won a prize, the value of the number of acquired balls area (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) for each prize ball of the left general winning opening 35 is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize in the left general prize opening 35 is displayed by the total number of prize balls displayed "total 122 prize balls in the left general winning opening". Here, it is also possible to display the number of winnings to the left general winning opening 35. In addition, the total number of prize balls is displayed so that it does not overlap with other effects (here, reach effect), but when the display range overlaps with other effects and becomes an obstacle, the total number of prize balls is displayed. It does not have to be done.

Even if each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2) other than the general winning opening has a prize, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning each winning opening and the number of winnings are displayed. May be good.

In FIG. 106B (G), the jackpot history display unit 760 of FIG. 96B (G) is provided with a general winning opening ratio display area 842 for displaying the left and right general winning opening ratios, and is general at the jackpot end timing (ending). The left and right general winning opening ratios are displayed in the winning opening ratio display area 842. It should be noted that the number of balls won, the bonus ratio (continuous bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio), and the left / right general winning opening ratio are included in one jackpot history and stored (B3401 in FIG. 106). Further, although the display of the continuous accessory ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. Further, in the player setting mode (FIG. 98) waiting for customers, the menu display (second selection unit 825) may be used to select whether or not to display the general winning opening ratio.

The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game, or one special game. Calculated for the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning slot during the period from the end of the game (before the end of the first special game, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on) to the end of the next special game. It may be a thing.

In FIG. 106B (K), since the right general winning opening 35 has won a prize, the value of the number of acquired balls area (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) for each prize ball of the right general winning opening 35 is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of prize balls obtained by winning the right general prize opening 35 is displayed by the total number of prize balls display "total of 152 right general prize opening prize balls". Here, it is also possible to display the number of winnings to the right general winning opening 35.

In FIG. 106B (ko), at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state), in addition to the bonus ratio, the left and right general winning opening ratios are displayed in the general winning opening ratio display area 842. NS. Although the display of the continuous accessory ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the specific gaming state, or the end of the special game. It may be calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period from time to the end of the specific gaming state (from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as information related to the prize ball. The effect control means (effect control device 300) can receive the payout command (FIG. 101), calculate the accessory ratio by itself, and display it on the display means (display device 41 or sub-display device 830). Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win a prize in the variable winning device, easy to win a prize in the general winning opening 35, etc.) by the display regarding the bonus ratio. In addition, when the bonus ratio is low, there are relatively many prizes in the general prize opening 35, etc., so by displaying the bonus ratio on the display means, the player will be interested in the general winning slot 35 as well. Become.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can calculate the general winning opening ratio from the received payout command and display it on the display means. For this reason, the player is also interested in the general winning opening 35. Further, when there is a prize in the general prize opening 35, the total number of prize balls and the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35 can be calculated from the received payout command and displayed on the display means. This increases the player's interest in the general winning opening 35.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same configurations as those of the first to fourth embodiments.

FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 107, the ejection ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 of the batch display device 50 are deleted from the game board of FIG. 2A, while the batch display device 50 is used. A first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 (first display) and a second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 (second display) are provided.

The effect control device 300 displays specific numerical values of the number of ejected balls, the ball ejection rate, and / or the accessory ratio on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 96-98. In this case, the effect control device 300 displays the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for customers (during the customer waiting state), and is in a state other than waiting for customers, that is, a state in which the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress. In the state where the game ball is being launched, the accessory ratio may not be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, it is possible to omit the high-probability (time saving) end processing of steps B1504 and B1507 of FIG. 90, the display setting of the accessory ratio in step B3402 of FIG. 105, and the like.

The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 as the first warning notification unit is composed of one LED (light emitting unit) and lights up when the total accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (predetermined value 70%). , Executes a warning display indicating that the ratio of all accessories has exceeded the standard value. The second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 as the second warning notification unit is composed of one LED (light emitting unit) and lights up when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds the reference value (predetermined value 60%). , Executes a warning display indicating that the continuous bonus ratio has exceeded the standard value.

The discharge ball number display unit 66, the ball ejection rate display unit 67, and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are composed of a 7-segment type display for displaying numerical values, which is costly. Since the ball ratio display unit 67 and the accessory ratio display unit 68 are eliminated and the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) are provided, the cost is reduced. Further, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 of the batch display device 50 are controlled by the game control device 100 (main board) to be inspected by the test firing test institution. Therefore, the reliability of the display is guaranteed.

The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control device 100 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10, and are provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine 10. It may be visible only from. The first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 may be installed on the board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this case, since the substrate (main substrate) of the game control device 100 is sealed (because it is crimped) so that it cannot be opened in the case, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio It becomes impossible to cheat on the display of the warning display unit 846.

In addition, instead of always displaying the bonus ratio warning display, for example, when the glass frame or front frame is opened, an error message (display of glass frame opening error, front frame opening error) and a warning of the bonus ratio are displayed. You may try to do it.

[Ball ejection performance monitoring process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ball ejection performance monitoring process according to the fifth embodiment. The payout performance monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). FIG. 108 shows step A9803 of FIG. 85 replaced with steps A9803a and A9803b. It should be noted that the steps having the same contents as the ball ejection performance monitoring process of FIG. 85 have the same step numbers and the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 calculates both the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio based on the number of winning balls (A9801, A9802), and then sets a warning display when the calculation result exceeds the reference value. (A9803a). When the calculation result of the total bonus ratio exceeds the reference value (70%), a warning display for lighting the first bonus ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) is set. When the calculation result of the continuous bonus ratio exceeds the reference value (60%), a warning display for lighting the second bonus ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) is set. When the calculation results of the total bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio exceed the respective reference values, the first bonus ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second bonus ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) Set a warning display to turn on both.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the warning display in the segment area. As a result, when displaying a warning, the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846 is turned on.

In addition to the first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and the second accessory ratio warning display unit 846, the first accessory ratio whose display control is executed by the payout control device 200 is the same as in the second embodiment. A warning display unit and a second accessory ratio warning display unit may also be provided in the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 calculates the bonus ratio based on the payout command, and when the calculation result of the bonus ratio exceeds the reference value, the first bonus ratio warning display unit and the second bonus ratio warning display. Turn on the part. The first accessory ratio warning display unit and the second accessory ratio warning display unit may be provided on the upper plate unit.

Further, a warning notification unit (first accessory ratio warning display unit 844 and / or second accessory ratio warning display unit 846) is provided on the display screen of the display device 41, and the accessory ratio is set to a reference value (predetermined value). When the amount is exceeded, a warning display indicating that the accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value may be displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. In this case, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the bonus ratio calculated by itself based on the payout command (FIG. 101) or the bonus ratio received from the game control device 100 exceeds the reference value, and the combination When the object ratio exceeds the reference value, a warning display is displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. Further, the upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b can be used as a warning notification unit, and the effect control device 300 can be configured to notify by voice from the warning notification unit when the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value. be. Further, when the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value, the external device (such as a hall computer) may be notified via the external information terminal 71 that the accessory ratio exceeds the reference value.

[Action / effect of the fifth embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) can notify that the bonus ratio exceeds the predetermined value when the bonus ratio exceeds the predetermined value. In this way, when it is notified (displayed) that the bonus ratio exceeds a predetermined value, the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win a variable winning device or a general prize is won by the notification (display) regarding the bonus ratio. It is possible to judge whether it is easy to win a prize in the mouth 35 or the like). In addition, when it is notified that the bonus ratio exceeds a predetermined value, there is a possibility that there are few prizes in the general winning opening 35, etc., so that the player will be interested in the general winning opening 35 as well. The fun of the game is improved.

The warning display means (first bonus ratio warning display unit 844 and / or second bonus ratio warning display unit 846) is controlled by the game control means (game control device 100), and the bonus ratio exceeds a predetermined value. It is possible to display that. Although the warning display means can be configured from, for example, one LED, a display (accessory ratio display unit 68) that directly displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio becomes unnecessary, and the cost can be reduced. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the prize ball to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the bonus ratio. It can also be displayed. Therefore, the player or the like can confirm the bonus ratio numerically, but the display means controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided in the normal gaming machine, and the large cost increase is achieved. No.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) may display the accessory ratio on the display screen of the display means (display device 41 or sub-display device 830) only while waiting for customers (during the customer waiting state). In this case, the bonus ratio is shown only to the players who have selected the gaming machine (game table) to be used, and the bonus ratio is not displayed during the game. Therefore, the display of the accessory ratio does not interfere with the effect of the display device 41 during the game. In addition, the control of the effect control means (effect control device 300) is simple.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can display the history information (big hit history) related to the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). be. In this case, it is possible to include in the history information and display the bonus ratio divided for each special game consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds. Here, the bonus ratio divided for each special game includes the bonus ratio measured by resetting each time the special game ends.

Therefore, by calculating the bonus ratio (which is known in advance to be an unstable value) divided for each special game, instead of the bonus ratio for the entire period, and displaying it on the display means. Players and the like try to judge whether or not the accessory ratio is an abnormal value based on their own knowledge and information other than the reference value, and misjudgment is reduced.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. The configurations other than those described below may be the same configurations as those of the first to fifth embodiments.

In the sixth embodiment, the number of large winning opening counts, which is the number of winnings in one big winning round to the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 9) and exceeds the first threshold value (for example, 10 to 10). When 11) is reached, the first over-winning notification is performed to notify that an over-winning (so-called over-winning) has occurred. Further, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the first threshold value and reaches the second threshold value (for example, 12, if the first threshold value is 10, 11 is also possible), a second for warning of an abnormal excess winning. Notify over winning. The second over winning notification is a notification in a mode different from that of the first over winning notification. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the over-winning notification is executed in two stages according to the number of large winning opening counts.

[Over winning notification processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a procedure of over-winning notification processing according to the sixth embodiment.

The over-winning notification process is executed by the effect control device 300 every time a game ball is won in the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39. The over winning notification process counts when a counting command (large winning opening count command) is received as information regarding winning to the large winning opening in step B1319 of the above-mentioned single-shot command processing (FIG. 88, FIG. 102). It may be executed after the count number (large winning opening count number) in the current round is updated by +1 in the information setting process (B1320: FIG. 89) (after step B1403). The number of large winning openings is the number of winnings to the large winning openings in one open state (open state, round). Further, the number of large winning opening counts is equal to the number of times the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the winning of the large winning opening or the number of transmissions from the game control device 100 in one big hit round.

Further, the over-winning notification process is a bonus when a payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) is received as information on a prize ball (information on winning a game ball) in step B1321 of a single-shot command process (FIG. 102). It may be executed in the ratio setting process (B1322: FIG. 103). That is, instead of the count number in the count information setting process (FIG. 89), the number of times the payout command corresponding to the winning to the winning opening in the current round can be used as the winning opening count.

In the sixth embodiment as well, as in the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. That is, the game control device 100 prepares a payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), and executes the effect command setting process (FIG. 59).

In the over-winning notification process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the large winning opening count number (counting number) has been +1 updated, that is, whether or not the large winning opening has won a prize (B3801). If there is no +1 update of the large winning opening count, that is, if there is no winning in the large winning opening (the result of B3801 is "N"), the over winning notification process is terminated. In addition, every time one big hit round is completed, the number of big winning openings is cleared to 0.

When the effect control device 300 has a +1 update of the large winning opening count, that is, when there is a winning in the large winning opening (the result of B3801 is "Y"), the large winning opening count is equal to or higher than the first threshold value. (B3802). The first threshold value is a value (for example, 10 to 11) larger than the upper limit value (for example, 9) of the number of large winning openings. When the number of large winning openings is not equal to or more than the first threshold value (the result of B3802 is "N"), the over winning notification processing is terminated.

When the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the first threshold value (the result of B3802 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines the number of over-winning balls (the number of over-winning balls) indicating the number of over-winning balls. The number of prize balls (14 in this case) of the big winning opening is added (B3803). In addition, the number of over-winning balls is the total number of prize balls paid out by over-winning during one big hit (during a predetermined game state). At the end of the jackpot ending, the number of over-winning balls will be cleared to 0.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the number of winning openings is equal to or greater than the second threshold value (B3804). The second threshold value is a value larger than the first threshold value of the number of large winning opening counts (for example, 12 or 11 if the first threshold value is 10), and is holed by the hole / player setting mode processing as described later. Hall personnel such as staff at the (game store) can be changed.

When the number of large winning openings is not equal to or higher than the second threshold value (the result of B3804 is "N"), that is, when the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the first threshold value and less than the second threshold value, the number of large winning openings is the upper limit. (For example, 9) is exceeded (that is, the occurrence of an over prize) is notified, and the first over prize notification is executed (B3805). The process of step B3805 constitutes the first notification means. Further, the upper limit value is the number of large winning opening counts at which the special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) starts closing.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the second threshold value (the result of B3804 is "Y"), that is, the number of large winning openings exceeds the first threshold value and further becomes the second threshold value ( For example, when 12) is reached, a second over-winning notification is executed to notify and warn that the over-winning is abnormal (excessive winning) (B3806). The process of step B3806 constitutes a second notification means.

Even if the player is playing a normal game, the number of large winning opening counts may reach the first threshold value by chance. In addition, as an effect during the big hit round, the game ball is retained for a predetermined period in the retention portion arranged at the upper part of the special variation prize device 39, and then the retention portion is opened and the game ball is dropped to the special variation prize device 39 at once. There is a gaming machine having such a configuration, but when it has such a configuration, the number of winning opening counts reaches the first threshold value relatively easily. However, at the second threshold value, the player may make an irregular hit as a special hitting method, or a game ball with a thread may be invaded into the special variable winning device 39 and repeatedly put in and out of the large winning opening. It is difficult to reach without cheating.

[Over winning notification mode]
FIG. 110A is a table showing an example of the notification mode of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. For example, the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification are executed using voice and / or image display as the notification method.

In the first over winning notification, the effect control device 300 sends the voice of the character A (for example, "Wow!") From the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character A and its dialogue (for example, "Wow!") Are sent to the display device 41. ! ”) Is displayed as an image. In the second over winning notification, the effect control device 300 sends the voice of the character B (for example, "collar!") From the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character B and its dialogue (for example, "collar!") Are sent to the display device 41. ) Is displayed as an image. Character A and character B are different characters, and for example, characters A and B may be characters of the main character and its enemies in the motif (subject) of the production, respectively.

As described above, the second over winning notification is a notification in a different mode from the first over winning notification, and the first over winning notification gives a comfortable impression to the player, whereas the second over winning notification is a notification. It gives an unpleasant impression to the player and gives a warning.

As the voice, a simple sound or music may be used instead of the voice. For example, even if the first over winning notification is notified by a blessing sound (a sound that causes a player to feel comfortable) and the second over winning notification is notified by a warning sound (a sound that causes a player to feel unpleasant). good.

FIG. 110B is a table showing the light emitting mode of the LED that illuminates the inside of the large winning opening as another example of the notification mode of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. The first over winning notification and the second over winning notification may be executed by using the light emission of the LED that illuminates the inside of the large winning opening in addition to the voice and the image display or in addition to the voice and the image display as the notification method. .. The LED that illuminates the inside of the large winning opening is provided in the special variable winning device 39 as one of the board decoration devices 46.

The effect control device 300 emits a yellow LED that illuminates the inside of the large prize opening in the sense of congratulating the over prize in the first over prize notification, and warns the over prize in the second over prize notification. The LED that illuminates the mouth is made to emit red light. The LED that illuminates the inside of the big prize opening usually emits white light. In another light emitting mode, the LED may be blinked in different modes as the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 111 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the sixth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition from the middle of the big hit round to the end of the big hit (at the end).

(Sa) in FIG. 111 is the same as (e) in FIG. 96A, and shows the screen of the eighth round (8R) of the jackpot.

In (S), in the 8th round (8R), the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit at which the large winning openings start to be blocked and reaches the first threshold value (for example, 10), so that the first over winning notification is executed. Has been done. In the first over prize notification, the character A (frog) and its dialogue (for example, "Wow!") Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character A (for example, "Wow!"). In addition, as a display or voice in the first over winning notification, it may be more directly notified that the number of large winning openings has reached the first threshold value (for example, "Wow! 10 achieved!").

In (s), in the eighth round, since the number of large winning openings count exceeds the first threshold value and reaches the second threshold value (for example, 11), the second over winning notification is executed. In the second over winning notification, the character B (snake) and its dialogue (for example, "collar!") Are displayed on the display device 41. At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character B (for example, "collar!"). In addition, as a display or voice in the second over winning notification, it may be more directly notified that the number of large winning openings has reached the second threshold value (for example, "11 is too much. Collar!"). ).

(C) of FIG. 111 is the same as (f) of FIG. 96A, and shows the screen of the final round (16R) of the big hit.

(S) in FIG. 111 corresponds to (G) in FIG. 96B, but in the display device 41 during the ending at the end of the special game state (big hit), the over-winning to the big winning opening is made during one big hit. The number of balls (the number of prize balls) acquired by the player is displayed as "224 cars" as the number of outstanding balls. Here, "both" means the number, but "both" does not have to correspond exactly to the number as long as it reflects the number. For example, it is also possible to display "112 cars" with "both" as a unit of two.

By displaying the number of balls (number of prize balls) obtained by over-winning, the player can have a superiority complex that a large number of over-winning can be generated, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if the hall staff and other hall personnel confirm that the number of balls that have been won by over-winning is extremely large, there is a possibility that the player is beating irregularly or cheating. Therefore, the player can be marked as a person to be watched.

Also, on the ending screen of (So), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "2016 cars", but it is equivalent to 14 prize balls x 9 counts (upper limit of count number) x 16 rounds = 2016. be. That is, the number of acquired balls is obtained by subtracting the number of balls obtained by over-winning (the number of great balls) from the number of balls finally acquired in one big hit (2240). Further, the number of balls (number of prize balls) obtained by winning the general winning opening 35 during the big hit is displayed as "bonus". Here, about 3 prizes per 10 prize balls x 1R x 16R = 480 pieces are exemplified as the number of balls to be paid out by winning a prize in the general prize opening 35.

In addition, in (S) of FIG. 111, the right-handed display (“Right-handed! →”), which is a notification instructing the player to hit right, which is omitted in (K) of FIG. 96B, is ending. Is also running. Here, since the right-handed display is information related to the player's operation on the operation unit (increasing the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 24), it is displayed on the front side in preference to other displays. There is. Here, the right-handed display as information about the player's operation may be displayed darkly, the other display may be displayed lightly, and if the display range of the other display overlaps with the right-handed display, the other display may be displayed. Does not have to be displayed. Further, when the display range of the right-handed display overlaps with other displays, those displays may be displayed alternately. That is, by displaying the information to be displayed when various displays are mixed based on the preset priority, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the displayed contents. Further, other displays are an effect image display in which a shooting star flows and a display in the dialogue display unit 770a, but may also include a display in the character 770 and the jackpot history display unit 760.

(T) of FIG. 111 corresponds to (c) of FIG. 96B, and shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH" occurs after the end of the big hit state. Right-handed display is being executed following (S).

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode process (B1010 in FIG. 78) according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 112, the over-winning setting process (B4001) is added to the hole / player setting mode process (FIG. 95) of the third embodiment, but the other steps are the same and the same step number is assigned. And the explanation is omitted.

For example, when a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined switch on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is "Y". ”), You can enter the hall setting mode (B2704-B2716).

The effect control device 300 executes the hall LED brightness adjustment process (B2707), the over-winning setting process (B4001), and then the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B2708). In the over-winning setting process, a second threshold value for notifying and warning that an abnormal over-winning (excessive winning) is set is set.

[Hall setting mode display screen]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hall setting mode. By drawing the screen according to the screen drawing start setting (B2704), various adjustment displays (meters, gauges, etc.) for making various adjustments, menu displays for making various selections, and the like are displayed on the display device 41.

The various adjustment displays include a volume setting display 861 for volume selection setting, a brightness setting display 863 for LED brightness selection setting, an over-winning warning setting display 865 for selection setting of the second threshold value, and a liquid crystal brightness (LCD brightness. There is a liquid crystal brightness setting display 867 for selecting and setting the brightness of the display device 41). In the menu display, the power saving setting display 869 for selecting and setting the power saving, the logo color setting display 871 for selecting and setting the issue color of the logo accessory, and the selected operation for confirming the selection setting. The setting confirmation operation display 873, which confirms the setting when there is a setting confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 25), and the factory default setting display 875 for selecting whether or not to set the factory default setting. be.

In addition, on the display screen in the hall setting mode, an operation method display 877 suggesting an operation method of the effect button 25 and a fourth symbol setting display 879 for setting the fourth symbol of the special figure variation display game are displayed. The fourth symbol (fourth special symbol) is the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol) of the display device 41 in the decorative special symbol variation display game. As a decorative special symbol (identification information) other than the symbol, it fluctuates due to repeated (blinking) lighting display and extinguishing display, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by the display device 41, other sub-display devices, or the LED lamp.

In the over winning warning setting display 865, the meter is displayed by one scale (one step) by default, and indicates the default value of the second threshold value. Since the first threshold value differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10, the default value of the second threshold value also differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 can set the default value of the second threshold value and the first threshold value in the model setting process (B1302 in FIG. 88 or FIG. 102) according to the received model designation command (model information). As described above, since the default value of the second threshold value becomes a value corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, the selection setting of the second threshold value can be easily performed.

For example, if the first threshold for over-winning is 10, the default value for the second threshold is 11. The operator (particularly, the staff of the game store) displays the over-winning warning setting display 865 in a specific display mode (highlight display (see black frame)) by touching the effect button 25 in the vertical direction, and the left and right of the effect button 25. The value of the second threshold value is increased or decreased by touching the direction. When the effect button 25 is touch-operated to the right, the meter displayed on the over-winning warning setting display 865 increases to two scales (two steps), and the second threshold value is displayed as 12 next to the meter. The meter can be adjusted in 1 to 5 scales (1 to 5 steps). When the setting confirmation operation display 873 is selected by the vertical touch operation of the effect button 25 and the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (the operation of pressing the effect button 25) is performed, the selected second threshold value is confirmed. In this way, the second threshold value can be flexibly set (changed) according to the intention of the game store (hall) side.

As a modification of the above sixth embodiment, the following configuration is also possible.

The configuration is such that the over-winning notification (first over-winning notification or second over-winning notification) is executed every time an over-winning occurs, but when the number of large winning openings reaches the first threshold value or the second threshold value ( Immediately after), the over-winning notification may be executed, and if the number of large winning opening counts is other than the first threshold value and the second threshold value, the over-winning notification may not be executed.

In a special gaming state consisting of a predetermined number of round games, the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification may be executed only in a specific round (specific round game). In particular, in the final round, since the time until the ending is short, it is not necessary to execute the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification so as not to overlap with the ending.

Further, it is also possible to transmit a payout command (FIGS. 83, 101) from the game control device 100 to the game hall internal management device (hall computer) as an external device, and execute the over-winning notification process of FIG. 109 in the external device. .. In this case, it is not always necessary to execute the first over winning notification in the external device, but the second over winning notification is executed.

Further, the over-winning notification of the sixth embodiment can be applied not only to the over-winning of the large winning opening but also to the over-winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening). For example, in a predetermined gaming state (specific gaming state, general electric support state, etc.), the effect control device 300 has a reference value (the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening) during one opening of the normal variable winning device 37. When the first threshold value (for example, 3 pieces) larger than (for example, 2 pieces) is reached, the first over winning notification is executed, and when the second threshold value (for example, 4 pieces) is reached, the second over winning notification is executed. It's okay. The effect control device 300 counts the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) as the count number by receiving the payout command (FIGS. 83, 101) from the game control device 100. This can be done, and the over-winning notification process of FIG. 109 can be applied. As a result, even with respect to the normal variable winning device 37, it is possible to execute different over-winning notifications in two stages to enhance the interest of the game and warn against abnormal over-winning (over-winning).

[Action / effect of the sixth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 has a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game or normal map variation display game) is a predetermined result. And a specific game state (Public power support state)) can be generated. The variable winning device (special variable winning device 39 or normal variable winning device 37) is in an open state (open state, operating state) in a predetermined gaming state, and is in a closed state (non-open state, non-operating state) in the open state. Winning a game ball becomes easier. The detection means (count switch 39a (large winning opening switch) and starting opening 2 switch 37a) detects the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) produces information (large winning opening count command or payout command) regarding the winning of the game ball when the detection means detects the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device. It is transmitted to the control means (effect control device 300). In the first notification means (B3805 of FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300), the number of times the game ball is won to the variable winning device (or the number of times the information regarding the winning of the game ball is transmitted) is once. When the first threshold value is reached in the open state, the first excess winning notification (first over winning notification) is executed. The second notification means (B3806 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) reaches the second threshold value larger than the first threshold value in the number of times the game ball is won in the variable winning device in one open state. If so, the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification) is executed. For example, the notification mode of the second excess winning notification may be a warning unlike the notification mode of the first excess winning notification.

When the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device exceeds the upper limit value (specified number of times, reference value) or the first threshold value and becomes the second threshold value or more, the number of winnings is abnormally large and the possibility of chance is low. .. However, with the above configuration, when such an abnormal excess winning (over winning) occurs, it is possible to warn by the second excess winning notification (second over winning notification).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the second threshold value according to the operation (touch operation or the like) on the operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player. Is. Therefore, the second threshold value for giving a warning can be easily changed according to the intention of the game store (hall).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, in the effect control means (effect control device 300), the number of winnings to the variable winning device is equal to or more than the first threshold value in one predetermined gaming state (special gaming state or specific gaming state). The total number of prize balls paid out in this case is totaled (B3803 in FIG. 109), and the total number of prize balls is displayed on the display means (display device 41) at the timing when the predetermined gaming state ends. Therefore, the player can know how much the over-winning can be generated in the predetermined gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, hall officials such as hall staff may be cheating or cheating if the total number of balls, which indicates the number of balls won by over-winning, is extremely large. Can recognize sex.

[7th Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The configurations other than those described below may be the same configurations as those of the first to sixth embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect control device 300 uses the above-mentioned variation effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) to temporarily stop the effect of the decorative special figure variation display game as an effect during variation (variation effect). Set to include (sway fluctuation). The variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) or the like executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes a temporary stop execution means.

FIG. 114 is a timing chart illustrating a movement state of each decorative special symbol (identification information: left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the decorative special symbol variation display game according to the seventh embodiment. At the start of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 891 (first special symbol), the right symbol 892 (second special symbol), and the middle symbol 893 (third special symbol) all start to change. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time Ta from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped left symbol (first stop symbol) swings due to the vibration operation. This swaying fluctuation is a warning effect for notifying that the reach state may be reached when the right symbol 892 is stopped thereafter. For example, a reach is generated by increasing the swing width (movement width) of the swing fluctuation after the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, as compared with the case where the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is stopped without the reach occurring. The player is informed that there is a possibility of doing so.

Next, after a predetermined time Tb has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped and enters the reach state, and both the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (second stop symbol) are shaken by the vibration operation. Shake and fluctuate. After that, after a predetermined time Tc has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the middle symbol 893 temporarily stops and becomes a symbol confirmation waiting state, and the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 (the first). 3 The stop symbol) sways due to the vibration operation. Then, after a predetermined time Td has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the shaking fluctuation ends, the three stop symbols are completely stopped, the symbols are fixed, and the result (stop symbol) of the decorative special symbol variation display game is the jackpot result (special result mode). ) Or the result of the loss is confirmed.

If the symbol is not fixed, the re-variation may be started before the lapse of the predetermined time Td to provide a pseudo continuous notice. In particular, in the pseudo continuous notice, the revariable symbol may be temporarily stopped as the middle symbol 893. In the pseudo-continuous notice (pseudo-continuous production), the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stopped) in a stop mode other than the special result mode, and then pseudo-variable (re-variated) is repeated, and the fluctuation is performed multiple times. Display The effect is as if the games are being played continuously.

After the symbol confirmation timing Td, the time (period) for displaying the confirmed decoration special symbol is the symbol stop display time (for example, the time from Td until the next decoration special symbol variation display game starts, etc.) So, for example, 600 msec). In the present embodiment, the time (Td-Tc) in the symbol confirmation waiting state from the middle symbol stop timing Tc where the middle symbol 893 is temporarily stopped to the symbol confirmation timing Td is set longer than the symbol stop display time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that fluctuates again while waiting for the symbol to be confirmed.

FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the seventh embodiment, from the temporary stop (reach notice state) of one symbol of (na) to the reach occurrence of (d). This is an example of a screen transition showing the state of the decorative special figure variation display game up to the temporary stop of the three symbols (nu) (waiting for the symbol to be confirmed).

(N) in FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the lapse of the predetermined time Ta, and as the first temporary stop state, only the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped due to the shaking fluctuation and the reach notice is started. At the time of this reach notice, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 is oscillating (vibrating) with a large operating width V1 (first operating width). Since the movement width (amplitude) of the left symbol 891 is large, the player can pay attention and fully know what kind of symbol the right symbol 892 should temporarily stop to reach.

The left symbol 891 swings and fluctuates only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) with the reference position as the center, but instead, a large operating width (amplitude) W1 is performed only in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). You may make fluctuations in the shaking. The operation width W1 in the left-right direction may be the same as or different from the operation width V1 in the up-down direction. Further, when the left symbol 891 vibrates in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, the left symbol 891 may swing and fluctuate in the diagonal direction by setting the phases of the vibrations in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction to the same phase or the opposite phase. Further, the left symbol 891 can also move in a circular or elliptical shape by shifting the phase of vibration in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction from the same phase or the opposite phase.

(D) of FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the lapse of the predetermined time Tb, and as the second temporary stop state, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops following the left symbol 891, and reach occurs. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 vibrate in the second operating width (V2 or W2) to vibrate and fluctuate. Since the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 operate by shaking fluctuation, it is possible to notify the player that the symbol is in a temporary stop state in which the symbol is not completely stopped.

The mode of the swaying fluctuation of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (direction of swaying fluctuation of each symbol, operating width, etc.) may be the same or different. If they are the same, the sense of cooperation between the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 enhances the interest of the game, and if they are different, the player can be surprised.

The operation width V2 (or the operation width W2 in the left-right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol when the reach occurs is the operation width V1 (or the operation width W1 in the left-right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol at the time of the notice of reach of (na). ) Is smaller than (V1> V2, W1> W2). Therefore, the shaking fluctuation in (d) does not interfere with the reach production of movies and the like.

(N) in FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the lapse of the predetermined time Tc, and as the third temporary stop state, the middle symbol 893 is also temporarily stopped following the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892, and three symbols are displayed. Start shaking fluctuations. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 vibrate in the third operating width (V3 or W3) to vibrate and fluctuate. The mode of the swaying fluctuation of all the temporarily stopped symbols (the direction of the swaying fluctuation of each symbol, the operating width, etc.) may be the same or different from each other. Further, the third operation width may be set according to whether or not the special figure variation display game has a special result (big hit). For example, the third movement width may be set to be larger when the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is out of order than in the case of a big hit. That is, in this case, it is possible to increase the expectation that the re-variation will occur even in the case of an outlier, and to improve the interest of the game.

The operation width V3 (or the operation width W3 in the left-right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol in the state of waiting for the symbol confirmation is the operation width V1 (or the operation width in the left-right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol at the time of the reach notice of (na). It is smaller than W1) (V1> V3, W1> W3), and is less than or equal to the operation width V2 (or the operation width W2 in the left-right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol when the reach of (d) occurs (V2 ≧ V3). , W2 ≧ W3).

As described above, in the temporary stop execution means (variation effect setting process, etc.), the number of identification information to be temporarily stopped after the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) is larger than that of the first temporary stop. It is possible to execute a stop (later temporary stop) and set the vibration width of the identification information in the first temporary stop to be larger than the vibration width of the identification information in the second temporary stop. The first temporary stop (first temporary stop) is a temporary stop executed first, and if the second temporary stop (later temporary stop) is the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 115), 1 Corresponds to the second temporary stop ((na) in FIG. 115). The first temporary stop corresponds to the first or second temporary stop ((na) (d) in FIG. 115) if the second temporary stop is the third temporary stop ((nu) in FIG. 115).

As described above, the seventh embodiment embodies the following invention.

(1) A display device capable of displaying a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variablely displays a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols), and an effect capable of controlling the display of the variable display game on the display device. In a gaming machine equipped with control means
The effect control means includes a temporary stop executing means capable of executing a temporary stop in which at least one identification information is vibrated and displayed in the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game (FIG. 92). B1905, FIG. 114, FIG. 115),
The temporary stop executing means is a second temporary stop (for example, (for example, in FIG. 115) in which the number of identification information to be temporarily stopped is larger than that of the first temporary stop after the first temporary stop (for example, (na) in FIG. 115). D) or (nu)) is executed, and the vibrating width (amplitude V1) of the identification information in the first temporary stop is set larger than the vibrating width (amplitude V2 or V3) of the identification information in the second temporary stop. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means can execute a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop and a pseudo change after the temporary stop are repeated in the display device.

(3) The effect control means is characterized in that the vibration width of the identification information in the temporary stop is set according to whether or not the variable display game has a special result (big hit) (1) or (. The gaming machine described in 2).

[Action / effect of the 7th embodiment]
In the seventh embodiment described above, the vibration width of the identification information is larger than that of the first temporary stop executed earlier (for example, (a) in FIG. 115), the second temporary stop executed after the first temporary stop. (For example, (d) or (nu) in FIG. 115) becomes smaller. Therefore, toward the end of the decorative special figure variation display game (determination of the identification information), the vibration width of the identification information in the temporarily stopped state can be gradually reduced, and an unprecedented novel effect can be performed. The fun of the game is improved. In the conventional gaming machine, the width of the vibration of the identification information in the temporarily stopped state is not taken into consideration, and there is room for improvement in the interest of the gaming.

[Modification 1 of the 7th embodiment]
A modified example 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart illustrating a movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special figure variation display game according to the first modification. FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the first modification. Note that (d) and (nu) in FIG. 117 are the same as (d) and (nu) in FIG. 115.

In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, an example in which the reach develops into the SP reach is shown. As shown in FIG. 117 (d), at the time Tba from the start of the fluctuation, the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped and enters the reach state. Then, at time Tbb, the reach evolves into SP reach. After the development of SP reach, in order to display the SP reach effect (movie, etc.) in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are displayed in the upper left and upper right, respectively, as shown in FIG. 117 (ne). Move to the corner of. Then, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 that have moved to the corners are changed from the normal mode to the special mode so as to erase the others while leaving only the numerical part, and shake and fluctuate in the temporarily stopped state. That is, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 located in the corners are displayed in a special mode of a reduced size smaller than the normal mode of the normal size (FIG. 117 (d)) and temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (nu), at the middle symbol temporary stop timing Tc, the three symbols whose SP reach is completed and temporarily stopped vibrate and fluctuate. Here, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 have returned to their normal sizes.

Here, the variable effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) or the like executed by the effect control device 300 constitutes an identification information changing means capable of changing the identification information (decorative special symbol) from the normal mode to the special mode. .. Then, the identification information changing means (variation effect setting process, etc.) executes the first temporary stop (previous temporary stop) before the identification information is changed to the special mode, and after the identification information is changed to the special mode. The second temporary stop (later temporary stop) is executed. Therefore, in the time between the first temporary stop and the second temporary stop, the interest of the game can be enhanced by changing the identification information (decorative special symbol), and a special effect (SP reach effect, etc.) can be displayed on the display screen. You can free up space for display.

By the way, in this modification, the first temporary stop (first temporary stop) corresponds to the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 117), and the second temporary stop (later temporary stop) corresponds to the third temporary stop. Corresponds to the stop ((nu) in FIG. 117). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first temporary stop (first temporary stop) corresponds to the first temporary stop ((na) in FIG. 115), and the second temporary stop (later temporary stop) is the second or 3rd. It may correspond to the second temporary stop ((d) (nu) in FIG. 117).

The time (Td-Tc) in the symbol confirmation waiting state is set longer than the time (Tbb-Tba) from the time Tba to the time Tbb. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that fluctuates again while waiting for the symbol to be confirmed.

Further, in FIG. 116, the operating widths (V1, V2, W1, W2, V3, W3) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and / or the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 are The larger the value, the shorter the duration (duration) of the shaking fluctuation may be set. On the contrary, the smaller the operation width in the shaking fluctuation, the longer the duration (period) of the shaking fluctuation may be set. For example, the duration of the sway fluctuation is lengthened by making it inversely proportional to the movement width in the sway fluctuation. That is, when the fluctuation motion of the shaking fluctuation is large, the player has a high expectation that the shaking fluctuation of the special decorative symbol will continue, so that the time of the shaking fluctuation is set short. When the fluctuation motion of the shaking fluctuation is small, the expectation that the shaking fluctuation will continue is low, so conversely, the time of the shaking fluctuation is set longer. As a result, the symbol determination timing can be appropriately adjusted, and the expectation of the jackpot can be maintained while the expectation of the jackpot player can be distorted.

[Modification 2 of the 7th embodiment]
A modified example 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol in the decorative special figure variation display game according to the modification 2, and FIG. 118 is a case of a hit variation in which the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit. (B) shows the case of the deviation fluctuation in which the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment. FIG. 119 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the symbol confirmation waiting state in the modification 2, and (Nu-1) shows a case where the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit, (Nu-2). Indicates a case where the result of the decorative special figure variation display game is out of order. Note that (nu-1) and (nu-2) in FIG. 119 correspond to (nu) in FIG. 115.

The operation time of the shaking fluctuation from the temporary stop of the middle symbol to the symbol confirmation timing (the period of the symbol confirmation waiting state) is when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order than when it is a big hit. And / or may increase the operating width of the swing fluctuation during this operating time. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation that the re-variation will occur even in the case of a loss and improve the interest of the game.

That is, as shown in FIG. 118, if the symbol confirmation timings when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit and when the symbol confirmation timing is time Tda and Tdb, respectively, the period of the symbol confirmation waiting state when the result is out of order ( Tdb-Tc) may be longer than the period of the symbol confirmation waiting state (Tda-Tc) in the case of a big hit. As shown in (Nu-1) and (Nu-2) of FIG. 119, in the state of waiting for symbol confirmation, the operation width of the sway fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is larger in the operation widths V4 and W4 when they are out of alignment. It may be larger than the operating widths V3 and W3 in the case of a big hit (V4> V3, W4> W3). The operating widths V4 and W4 in the case of deviation may be larger than the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2, W4> W2), or may be smaller than the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2, W4> W2). V4 ≦ V2, W4 ≦ W2).

In addition, as shown in (Nu-3) (Nu-4) of FIG. 120, the modification 2 may be applied to the case of the big hit without the re-lottery and the case of the big hit with the re-lottery. That is, even if the case of the big hit of (Nu-1) and (Nu-2) of FIG. 119 is replaced with the case of the big hit without re-lottery and the case of the big hit with re-lottery, respectively, the modification 2 is applied. good. In addition, the re-lottery is, for example, changing a normal jackpot symbol (or a probability-changing jackpot symbol) that has been temporarily stopped once to a probability-changing jackpot symbol (or a probability-changing jackpot symbol) by changing it again when the re-lottery is won. To say.

In (Nu-3) of FIG. 120, the probabilistic jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, "7, 7, 7,", and in (Nu-4) of FIG. 120, the normal jackpot symbol is displayed as, for example, "2, 2, 2". Has been done. In the state of waiting for the symbol confirmation, the operation width of the sway fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is the operation width V4 and W4 in the case of the big hit with the re-lottery than the operation width V3 and W3 in the case of the big hit without the re-lottery. It may be increased (V4> V3, W4> W3). As a result, in the case of a big hit with a re-lottery, it is possible to notify the player of the possibility of re-variation due to the re-lottery.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, the present invention can be applied to a game machine such as a pachi-slot machine other than a pachinko machine (for example, a machine in which a bonus ratio and a ball ejection rate can be defined). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the following are typical viewpoints of the present invention other than those described in the claims.

(1) A game control means capable of executing a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect by a command from the game control means are provided, which is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined gaming state, a variable winning device that opens in the predetermined gaming state and makes it easier to win a game ball in the open state than in the closed state, and a game to the variable winning device. The game control means includes a detection means for detecting the winning of the ball, and the game control means controls the effect of the information regarding the winning of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device is detected by the detecting means. The first notification is transmitted to the means, and the effect control means executes the first excess winning notification when the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device reaches the first threshold value in one open state. The means and the second notification means for executing the second excess winning notification when the number of winnings of the game ball to the variable winning device reaches the second threshold value larger than the first threshold value in the one open state. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

(2) The second threshold value can be changed according to an operation to the operating means, which is provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, according to (1). Gaming machine.

(3) The effect control means is provided with a payout control means capable of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls for which the game ball wins the variable prize device, and the effect control means is the number of times the prize balls are won in the variable prize device in the predetermined game state. Is the first threshold value or more, the number of prize balls paid out is totaled, and the total number of prize balls is displayed on the display means at the timing when the predetermined gaming state ends (1). ) Or the gaming machine according to (2).

According to the inventions (1) to (3), it is possible to warn against an abnormal excess winning of a variable winning device while enhancing the interest of the game.

10 Gaming machine 30 Gaming board 30b Out port 32 Gaming area 35 General winning opening 36 1st starting winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable prize-winning device 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
65 Out ball detection switch 66 Out ball number display unit 67 Ball ejection rate display unit 68 Character ratio display unit 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device (payout control board)
300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply unit 760 Jackpot history display area 800 Character ratio display area 830 Sub display device 842 General winning opening ratio display area 844 1st character ratio warning display unit 846 2nd character ratio warning display area 865 Over winning warning setting display

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information including a character unit and a numerical unit, and an effect control means capable of controlling the display of the variable display game on the display device. ,
The effect control means includes a temporary stop execution means capable of executing a temporary stop in which at least one identification information is vibrated and displayed in the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game.
After the first temporary stop, the temporary stop executing means can execute the second temporary stop in which the number of identification information for executing the temporary stop is larger than that of the first temporary stop.
The identification information for executing the second temporary stop includes the identification information for executing the first temporary stop.
In the first temporary stop, the identification information is vibrated by a predetermined width, and in the second temporary stop, the vibrating width of the identification information is made smaller than the predetermined width, and
The vibration time of the identification information in the first temporary stop is made shorter than the vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop, and the vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop is changed. Display The result of the game is set to be longer than the symbol stop display time to display the confirmed identification information.
When the identification information is in the reach state and the specific effect is executed in the second temporary stop, the identification information is moved , the number part is left, and the character part is erased .
A gaming machine characterized in that all the identification information for executing the second temporary stop executes the temporary stop with the same vibration width. In a gaming machine provided with a display device capable of displaying a variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information including a character unit and a numerical unit, and an effect control means capable of controlling the display of the variable display game on the display device. ,
The effect control means includes a temporary stop execution means capable of executing a temporary stop in which at least one identification information is vibrated and displayed in the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game.
After the first temporary stop, the temporary stop executing means can execute a second temporary stop in which the number of identification information for executing the temporary stop is larger than that of the first temporary stop, and the temporary stop execution means can execute the second temporary stop. Later, it is possible to execute the third temporary stop in which the number of identification information for executing the temporary stop is larger than that of the second temporary stop.
The identification information for executing the second temporary stop includes the identification information for executing the first temporary stop.
In the first temporary stop, the identification information is vibrated by a predetermined width, and in the second temporary stop, the vibrating width of the identification information is made smaller than the predetermined width, and
The vibration time of the identification information in the first temporary stop is made shorter than the vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop, and the vibration time of the identification information in the second temporary stop is changed. Display The result of the game is set to be longer than the symbol stop display time to display the confirmed identification information.
When the identification information is in the reach state and the specific effect is executed in the second temporary stop, the identification information is moved , the number part is left, and the character part is erased .
The mode of the identification information in the third temporary stop when the result of the variable display game is a special result is different from the mode of the identification information in the third temporary stop when the result of the variable display game is not a special result. aspect and Do Ri,
Wherein all the identification information by the second run the temporary stop, the gaming machine characterized that you run a temporary stop at the same frequency width.

Images